100%(2)100% au considerat acest document util (2 voturi)
1K vizualizări542 pagini
This document provides an overview of the navigation systems on Airbus A319/A320/A321 aircraft. It describes the main components and functions of the Air Data/Inertial Reference System (ADIRS), landing and taxiing aids like ILS and markers, independent systems like radar and radio altimeter, and dependent systems such as DME, ADF, and VOR that provide positioning via communication with ground stations. The navigation systems provide crew with air data, attitude, heading, position, and guidance information required for safe flight.
This document provides an overview of the navigation systems on Airbus A319/A320/A321 aircraft. It describes the main components and functions of the Air Data/Inertial Reference System (ADIRS), landing and taxiing aids like ILS and markers, independent systems like radar and radio altimeter, and dependent systems such as DME, ADF, and VOR that provide positioning via communication with ground stations. The navigation systems provide crew with air data, attitude, heading, position, and guidance information required for safe flight.
This document provides an overview of the navigation systems on Airbus A319/A320/A321 aircraft. It describes the main components and functions of the Air Data/Inertial Reference System (ADIRS), landing and taxiing aids like ILS and markers, independent systems like radar and radio altimeter, and dependent systems such as DME, ADF, and VOR that provide positioning via communication with ground stations. The navigation systems provide crew with air data, attitude, heading, position, and guidance information required for safe flight.
EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 NAVIGATION UFD4200 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 34 CONTENTS Page ii Dec 31/00 34 - NAVIGATION 34-00-00 SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General ADIRS Landing and Taxiing Aids Systems Independent Position Determining Systems Dependent Position Determining Systems T M U N A 2 0 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 1 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM PRESENTATION GENERAL The aircraft navigation systems provide the crew with the data required for flight within the most appropriate safety requirements. This data is divided into four groups: - AIR DATA/INERTIAL REFERENCE SYSTEM (ADIRS), - LANDING AND TAXIING AIDS, - INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING, - DEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING. ADIRS The ADIRS is an integrated Air Data System and an Inertial Reference System. One part called Air Data Reference mainly computes speed and altitude information from air parameters. The other part called Inertial Reference mainly computes heading, attitude and position from gyros and accelerometers. The ADIRS is composed of three Air Data/Inertial Reference Units (ADIRUs). Besides the ADIRUs, there are still standby instruments: - Altimeter and Airspeed indicators directly supplied by pressure lines, - Standby Compass, - Standby Horizon. LANDING AND TAXIING AIDS The Head-Up Display (HUD) is used as a piloting aids system for roll out, take-off and landing (optional). The Instrument Landing System (ILS), is use to obtain the optimum aircraft position during an approach and landing phase. The Marker (MKR) system is used to indicate the distance to the runway threshold during an ILS descent. The aircraft is equipped with: - 1 HUD (optional), - 2 ILS, - 1 MARKER (Included in the VOR receiver). Frequency Control is achieved either automatically or manually (through the MCDU) by the Flight Management and Guidance Computers (FMGCs) or manually through the Radio Management Panels (RMPs). T M U N A 2 0 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 2 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U N A 2 0 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 SYSTEM PRESENTATION EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 3 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM PRESENTATION INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING SYSTEMS This part of the navigation systems, called independent system, provides information regarding the safety of the aircraft without taking reference from any ground station. The Weather Radar / Predictive Windshear (WR/PWS) system detects the position and intensity of precipitations which are shown on the Navigation Displays (NDs). The windshear capability serves to detect any sudden change of wind speed and/or direction (Optional). The Radio Altimeter (RA) system gives the aircraft height above the ground, independently of the atmospheric pressure. The Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) detects the aircraft in the immediate vicinity. The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) warns the flight crew about the aircraft behaviour in dangerous configuration when approaching the ground. This part of the Navigation system includes: - 1 Weather Radar / Predictive Windshear (WR/PWS) (the second is optional), - 2 Radio Altimeter (RA), - 1 Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS), - 1 Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS). DEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING SYSTEMS This part of the navigation system, called dependent system, provides various means of navigation through data exchange with ground installations or satellites. The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) system gives the aircraft slant distance to a ground station. The Air Traffic Control system (ATC) enables a ground operator to identify and track the aircraft without having to communicate with the flight crew. The Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) system is a radio compass system providing the azimuth of a Non Directional Beacon (NDB) with respect to the aircraft center line. The VHF Omni Range (VOR) system gives the bearing of a ground VOR Station with respect to the magnetic North and the aircraft angular deviation related to a preselected course. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is based on the measurement of the transmission time of signals broadcast by satellites. This part of the Navigation includes: - 2 DME, - 2 ATC, - 1 ADF (the second is optional), - 2 VOR, - 2 GPS. NOTE 1: The VOR or DME frequency control is achieved either automatically or manually (through the MCDU) by the FMGCs or manually though the RMPs. NOTE 2: Although the Marker Beacon belongs to the Landing Aids System, it is physically integrated into the VOR receiver. T M U N A 2 0 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 4 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-00-00 RADIO NAVIGATION CONTROL PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Automatic Tuning Manual Tuning Back-Up Tuning Self Examination T M U N A V 7 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 1 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 5 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO NAVIGATION CONTROL PRESENTATION AUTOMATIC TUNING The Automatic Tuning permits the control of VOR / DME, ILS and ADF by the Flight Management and Guidance System. In this case the RMP is transparent to its associated FMGC. In normal operation FMGC1 tunes receivers 1, FMGC2 tunes receivers 2. In case of failure of FMGC 1 or 2, the remaining FMGC controls all receivers. MANUAL TUNING The manual tuning permits the pilot to select, through the Multipurpose Control Display Unit, a specific frequency for display on the EFIS. NOTE: To return to the autotuning mode, the manual tuning has to be cleared. BACK-UP TUNING Radio Management Panels 1 and 2 located on the pedestal provide back-up for Radio Navigation tuning. We are in the case of both FMGCs inoperative or emergency electrical supply. The ILS course and frequency are the only Radio Navigation data exchanged. The selected values on RMP 1 and RMP 2 are identical for ILS 1 and ILS 2. T M U N A V 7 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 2 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 6 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO NAVIGATION CONTROL PRESENTATION T M U N A V 7 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 3 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 7 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION Can VOR 2 frequency be changed through RMP 1? A - Yes. B - No. In back-up mode, an ILS can be tuned through: A - RMP 1 or 2. B - RMP 1 only. C - The onside RMP only. T M U N A V 7 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 4 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 8 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-00-00 SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Multipurpose Control Display Unit (MCDU) ADIRS Control Display Unit (ADIRS CDU) Radio Management Panel (RMP) Audio Control Panel (ACP) T M U N A 2 1 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 1 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 9 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION MULTIPURPOSE CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (MCDU) The Multipurpose Control and Display Unit (MCDU) allows the crew: - To display the Radio Navigation frequencies (automatically or manually tuned) on a specific page called RAD/NAV. - To align the Inertial Reference systems from a specific page called INIT via the FMGC. - To initiate tests for all navigation systems and for troubleshooting via the CFDIU. T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 2 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 10 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION - MCDU T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 3 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 11 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION ADIRS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (ADIRS CDU) The ADIRS Control and Display Unit allows the following functions: - To switch on the ADR and IR by setting a single control to NAV. - To disconnect the ADR output bus by a specific pushbutton. - To check the ADIRU operation - To align the IR instead of using the MCDU. NOTE: when set to ATT, the systems are still energized but the IR is in downgraded operation mode. T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 4 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 12 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION - ADIRS CDU T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 5 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 13 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL (RMP) The main function of the Radio Management Panels (RMP) is to control all communication frequencies. However they are also used for standby selection of Radio/NAV frequencies. The standby operation is used in case of dual FMGC failure, provided the NAV pushbutton switch has been pressed. T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 6 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 14 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION - RMP T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 7 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 15 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION AUDIO CONTROL PANEL (ACP) The Audio Control Panels (ACP) enable to control the reception of all audio signals identifying the various beacons and stations. NOTE: DME identification signals can be selected by using the knob of the colocated VOR or ILS. T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 8 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 16 EFFECTIVITY ALL SYSTEM CONTROLS PRESENTATION - ACP T M U N A 2 1 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 9 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 17 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A 2 1 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 10 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 18 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-20-00 STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Standby Compass Standby Horizon Standby Altimeter Standby Airspeed Indicator (ASI) Metric Altimeter (Option) T M U N A V E 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 1 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 19 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION STANDBY COMPASS The standby compass is located on the top windshield center post. It is stowed in normal configuration. A correction card is glued to the side of the compass assembly. Non-magnetic lamp: - A non-magnetic lamp assembly lights the compass card. It is controlled by a STBY COMPASS switch located on the INT LT panel on the overhead panel. Graduated compass: - The graduated compass card is attached to a magnetic element. It is free to rotate inside the compass bowl and is immersed in a damping liquid. Lubber line: - A lubber line indicates the magnetic heading. Compensation holes: - Two holes marked NS and EW, allow compensation by positioning two small magnetic bars called compensators. T M U N A V E 0 3 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 2 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 20 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION - COMPASS T M U N A V E 0 3 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 3 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 21 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION STANDBY HORIZON The Standby horizon is located on the center instrument panel and comprises the following elements: Roll pointer: - The roll information is given by a pointer which moves in front of a graduated roll scale. Roll scale: - The roll scale is graduated in 10 degree increments between -30 and +30 degrees and 15 degree increments up to 60 degrees. Flag: - The flag comes into view if a failure is detected in the electrical power supply or if the gyro rotor speed drops below 18000 RPM. Pitch drum: - The pitch drum is divided into two zones separated by the reference horizon. The pitch indications are displayed between -80 and +80 degrees. Aircraft symbol: - The aircraft symbol is fixed. Resetting knob: - Fast resetting can be performed by pulling the caging knob (Also used for shipping to protect the gyro). T M U N A V E 0 3 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 4 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 22 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION - HORIZON T M U N A V E 0 3 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 5 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 23 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION STANDBY ALTIMETER The Standby Altimeter is located on the center instrument panel and comprises the following elements: Adjustable bugs: - Four manually adjustable bugs are provided for reference altitude setting. Altitude counter: - A display counter made up of two drums displays the tens of thousands, and the thousands of feet. When the altitude is below 10000 feet, the left drum displays black and white stripes. In case of negative altitude the left drum displays orange and white stripes. Altitude pointer: - The pointer indicates the hundreds of feet with 20 feet increments. To prevent the pointer from sticking, an internal vibrator is installed. It is only supplied in flight. Altitude dial: - The altitude dial is calibrated from O to 1000 feet with 20 feet graduations. Baro correction counter: - The baro correction is displayed on a counter graduated in hecto Pascals. Adjustment baro setting knob: - The knob enables adjustment of the baro setting in the range of 750 to 1050 hecto Pascals. T M U N A V E 0 3 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 6 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 24 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION - ALTIMETER T M U N A V E 0 3 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 7 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 25 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION STANDBY AIRSPEED INDICATOR (ASI) The Standby Airspeed Indicator (ASI) is located on the center instrument panel and comprises the following elements: Ajustable bugs: - Four manually adjustable bugs are provided for reference speed setting. Speed pointer: - The pointer moves on a graduated dial. Speed dial: - The dial is made of two linear scales: one from 60kt to 250kt with 5kt increments, the other from 250 to 450kt with 1Okt increments. T M U N A V E 0 3 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 8 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 26 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION - AIRSPEED INDICATOR T M U N A V E 0 3 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 9 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 27 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION METRIC ALTIMETER (OPTION) The Metric Altimeter is located on the center instrument panel and comprises the following elements: A display counter, made up of two drums displays the tens of thousands and the thousands of meters. Altitude counter: - When the altitude is below 10,000 meters, the left drum displays black and white stripes. In case of negative altitude the left drum displays orange and white stripes. Altitude pointer: - The pointer indicates the hundreds of meters with 50 meter increments. Altitude dial: - The altitude dial is calibrated from O to 1000 meters with 50 meter graduations. Baro correction counter: - The baro correction is displayed on a the lower counter and is graduated in hecto Pascals. Adjustment baro setting knob: - The knob enables adjustment of the baro setting in the range of 870 to 1050 hecto Pascals. T M U N A V E 0 3 - T 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 10 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 28 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U N A V E 0 3 - P 0 5
L E V E L
1 STANDBY INSTRUMENT PRESENTATION - METRIC ALTIMETER (OPTION) EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 11 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 29 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A V E 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 12 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 30 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-00-00 RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL (RMP) PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General Standby Navigation Keys Rotating Knob Standby/Course (STBY/CRS) Window Active Window T M U N A 2 2 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 1 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 31 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL (RMP) PRESENTATION GENERAL The radio Nav frequency selection can only be performed when the guarded NAV key LED is on, after a dual FMGS loss The ON/OFF switch controls the power supply of the RMP. STANDBY NAVIGATION KEYS As long as the NAV key is the only STBY NAV key selected, the windows still display communication frequencies. Then, pressing the VOR, ILS or ADF key changes the displays to the last RMP memorized values (frequency and course). At any time, communication frequencies are still selectable, simply by pressing the corresponding key. Beat Frequency Oscillator (BFO) is set on or off by pressing the key. NOTE: The Microwave Landing System (MLS) key is a provision. ROTATING KNOB Two concentric knobs allow preselection of frequency for radio communication and standby navigation systems and selection of the required course for VORs and ILSs: - the outer knob controls the most significant digits, - the inner knob controls the least significant digits. The desired frequency or course is set in the STBY/CRS window. Frequency becomes active by pressing the transfer key. STANDBY/COURSE (STBY/CRS) WINDOW The STANDBY/COURSE window displays a standby frequency or a course. Both can be changed by rotating the knob, but only the standby frequency can be made active by pressing the transfer key. If a course is displayed, the associated frequency is displayed in the ACTIVE window. NOTE: If a course is displayed on the STBY/CRS window, pressing the transfer key will display the ACTIVE frequency in both windows. ACTIVE WINDOW The active window shows the frequency in use of the system identified by the green LED on the selected key. T M U N A 2 2 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 2 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 32 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL (RMP) PRESENTATION T M U N A 2 2 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 3 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 33 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A 2 2 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 4 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 34 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-00-00 DDRMI PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General Normal Operation Failure and Non Computed Data (NCD) Self Examination T M U N A V F 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 1 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 35 EFFECTIVITY ALL DDRMI PRESENTATION GENERAL The Digital Distance and Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI) is located on the center instrument panel. Its a combined VOR/ADF/DME RMI. Note: Some DDRMIs are not equipped with the ADF capability. NORMAL OPERATION The DME 1 Distance is displayed in the left hand window. The DME 2 Distance is displayed in the right hand window. A single pointer indicates the VOR 1 or ADF 1 bearing. A double pointer indicates the VOR 2 or ADF 2 bearing. The selection of VOR or ADF is provided for each pointer by a selector switch. T M U N A V F 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 2 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 36 EFFECTIVITY ALL DDRMI PRESENTATION - NORMAL OPERATION T M U N A V F 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 3 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 37 EFFECTIVITY ALL DDRMI PRESENTATION FAILURE AND NON COMPUTED DATA (NCD) When a failure is detected by the DME or RMI monitoring circuits, the corresponding DME display window is blanked. In case of Non Computed Data (NCD), for example: - out-of-range station, the window shows white horizontal dashed lines. Heading information normally comes from ADIRU 1. If it fails, the heading is provided by ADIRU 3 after pilot switching. In case of VOR or ADF 1 or 2 receiver failure, a red flag comes into view and the corresponding pointer is set to the 3 oclock position. In case of Non Computed Data (NCD), no failure flag appears, but the corresponding pointer is set to the 3 oclock position. T M U N A V F 0 2 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 4 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 38 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U N A V F 0 2 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 DDRMI PRESENTATION - FAILURE AND NON COMPUTED DATA (NCD) EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 5 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 39 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION From which ADIRU can the DDRMI receive information ? A - ADIRU 1 or 2. B - ADIRU 2 or 3. C - ADIRU 1 or 3. T M U N A V F 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 6 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 40 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS PRINCIPLE CONTENTS: General ADM Functional Description ADM Inputs ADM Output ADR Computation IR Strapdown Ring Laser Gyro Accelerometer IR Computation T M U A D I 0 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 41 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE GENERAL The Air Data/Inertial Reference Unit (ADIRU) comprises an Air Data Reference Unit and an Inertial Reference Unit, both included in a single unit. Data from external sensors (Angle of Attack, Total Air Temperature, Air Data Module) are used by the ADIRU. The ADIRUs are interfaced with the ADIRS Display Control Unit (CDU) for control and status annunciation. T M U A D I 0 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 42 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE - GENERAL T M U A D I 0 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 43 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE ADM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION A microcomputer processes an ARINC signal according to the discrete inputs and to the digitized pressure. ADM INPUTS The ADM Inputs are one pressure input and several discrete inputs. The ADMs are identical. The discrete inputs determine the ADM location and the type of pressure data (Pitot or Static) provided to the ADR. ADM OUTPUT The ADM output is an ARINC bus which provides digital pressure information, type of pressure, ADM identification and BITE status to the ADIRU. T M U A D I 0 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 44 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE - ADM T M U A D I 0 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 45 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE ADR COMPUTATION The ADR processes sensor and ADM inputs in order to provide air data to users. T M U A D I 0 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 46 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE - ADR T M U A D I 0 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 47 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE IR STRAPDOWN In a strapdown Inertial Reference System the gyros and the accelerometers are solidly attached to the aircraft structure. The strapdown laser gyro provides directly accelerations and angular speeds. T M U A D I 0 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 48 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE - IR T M U A D I 0 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 49 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE RING LASER GYRO The three ring laser gyros, one for each rotation axis, provide inertial rotation data and are composed of two opposite laser beams in a ring. At rest, the two beams arrive at the sensor with the same frequency. An aircraft rotation creates a difference of frequencies between the two beams. The frequency difference is measured by optical means providing a digital output which, after computation, will provide rotation information. NOTE: Light Amplification Stimulated Emission of Radiation (LASER) T M U A D I 0 0 1 - T 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 50 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE - GYRO T M U A D I 0 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 11 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 51 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE ACCELEROMETER Three accelerometers, one for each axis, provide linear accelerations. The acceleration signal is sent to a processor which uses this signal to compute the velocity and the position. IR COMPUTATION Each ADIRU computes the laser gyro and the accelerometer outputs to provide Inertial Reference data to users. T M U A D I 0 0 1 - T 0 6
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 12 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 52 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRINCIPLE - ACCELEROMETER T M U A D I 0 0 1 - P 0 6
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 13 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 53 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I 0 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 14 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 54 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General MCDU ADIRS CDU Probes FCU GPS DMC DMC/PFD & ND ADIRS Switching Users Self Examination T M U A D I A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 55 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRESENTATION GENERAL The Air Data Inertial Reference System (ADIRS) is composed of three Air Data Inertial Reference Units (ADIRU), each having their own set of probes and sensors and a common Control Display Unit (CDU). MCDU The Multipurpose Control and Display Units (MCDUs) are normally used to align the Inertial References, to initiate the ADIRU tests and to display ADIRU information. ADIRS CDU The ADIRS Control Display Unit is used as a back-up for Inertial Reference alignment. It is also used for mode selection, information display and status indication. PROBES The Air Data input parameters, such as total and static pressures, Angle Of Attack (AOA) and Total Air Temperature (TAT) are sent, from the related probes and sensors, to the three ADIRUs. NOTE : static and total pressure are sent to the ADIRUs via the ADMs. FCU The ADIRUs receive, from the Flight Control Unit (FCU), the Baro correction set by the crew. GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) provides data to the ADIRS, mainly A/C position and speed. The ADIRS processes the GPS data and provides pure GPS data, pure IR data and hybrid GPS/ADIRS data to users. DMC The Display Management Computers (DMCs) 1 and 2 receive their data from their related ADIRU and from ADIRU 3. The Display Management Computer 3 (DMC3) receives information from all three ADIRUs, to operate as a back-up in case of DMC1 or 2 failure. DMC/PFD & ND ADIRU 1 and 2 display information via DMC 1 and 2, on the corresponding Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Navigation Display (ND). ADIRU 3 operates as a back-up in case of ADIRU 1 or 2 failure. T M U A D I A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 56 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRESENTATION T M U A D I A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 57 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS PRESENTATION ADIRS SWITCHING Basically, ADIRU 1 is associated to the captain instruments, ADIRU 2 to the first officer instruments and ADIRU 3 is in standby. In case of failure of the Air Data Reference (ADR) or Inertial Reference (IR) function of ADIRU 1 or 2, the affected instruments and displays may be manually switched independently to ADIRU 3 by means of selector switches. USERS The ADIRUs are directly connected to other user system. T M U A D I A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 58 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION Which ADIRU does not supply DMC 1? A - ADIRU 1. B - ADIRU 2. C - ADIRU 3. T M U A D I A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 59 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 60 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-13-00 AIR DATA PROBES PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Pitot Probes Static Ports AOA Sensors TAT Sensors Water Drain Self Examination T M U A D I B 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-13-00 Page 1 May 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 61 EFFECTIVITY ALL AIR DATA PROBES PRESENTATION PITOT PROBES The total pressure is sent from the Pitot Probes to the Air Data Modules which convert it into ARINC words used by the Air Data Inertial Reference Units. Three pitot probes provide total pressure to three Air Data Modules (ADM) which convert this pressure into digital format (ARINC 429). ARINC words are then sent to the corresponding Air Data Inertial Reference Unit (ADIRU). The standby pitot probe supplies the standby Airspeed Indicator (ASI) and ADR3 through its related ADM. STATIC PORTS Each Air Data Module transforms the static pressure coming from the static ports into ARINC words. Six static ports provide static pressure to five ADMs which convert this pressure into digital format (ARINC 429). The standby static ports provide an average pressure directly to the standby instruments, and to ADR3 through a single ADM. AOA SENSORS Each ADIRU receives angle of attack information from its corresponding Angle Of Attack (AOA) sensors. The Angle Of Attack sensors are also called Alpha probes. TAT SENSORS The three ADIRUs receive Total Air Temperature information from two Total Air Temperature sensors. NOTE: that ADIRU3 receives the Total Air Temperature (TAT) from the TAT 1 sensor which is composed of two elements. WATER DRAIN The probes are installed in such a way that their pressure lines do not require a water drain, except for that of the standby static ports. T M U A D I B 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-13-00 Page 2 May 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 62 EFFECTIVITY ALL AIR DATA PROBES PRESENTATION T M U A D I B 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-13-00 Page 3 May 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 63 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION How do pitot and static probes supply the ADIRUs? A - Using ADMs which convert pressure into digital format. B - Directly with total and static pressures. C - Directly with digital format. Where does ADIRU3 receive TAT information from? A - Captain TAT sensor. B - First-Officer TAT sensor. C - Standby TAT sensor. Which pressure line(s) need(s) to be drained? A - All pitot lines. B - All static lines. C - Only the standby static line. T M U A D I B 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-13-00 Page 4 May 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 64 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION CONTENTS: System Selector Keyboard ON BAT Light IR Lights Mode Rotary Selector ADR P/BSW Data Selector Data Display Status Messages Status Action Codes Self Examination T M U N A V 1 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 65 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION SYSTEM SELECTOR In OFF position, the CDU display is not energized (Blank Display). In position 1, 2 or 3 the corresponding system is selected for data display. KEYBOARD The keyboard is used to enter in the selected system the present position for alignment or Magnetic Heading if in ATTITUDE mode. N, S, E, W keys permit position entry. H allows heading entry in attitude mode. The green ENTER pushbutton light comes on when either the NORTH, SOUTH, WEST, EAST, or HEADING has been selected. When pressed the displayed data is entered into the Inertial Reference Systems. The green CLEAR pushbutton light comes on when any key has been pressed. When pressed, the displayed data, not yet entered, is cleared. ON BAT LIGHT The amber ON BAT light comes on when one or more Air Data Inertial Reference Unit are operating on aircraft batteries. The ON BAT light comes on for five seconds during the power up test. ON BAT stays off in case of fast realignment. IR LIGHTS An amber FAULT light comes on, accompanied by ECAM activation when a fault affects the related Inertial Reference. When flashing, attitude and heading may be recovered in ATT mode. A white ALIGN light illuminates steady when the related Inertial Reference is in the alignment phase. The ALIGN light goes off when alignment has been completed. ALIGN light flashes in case of: - An alignment error - No Present Position entry within ten minutes of NAV mode selection. - Significant difference memorized position at shutdown and entered position. MODE ROTARY SELECTOR The mode rotary selector permits selection of three modes for each Inertial Reference. In OFF position, the ADIRU is not energized (ADR and IR data not available). NAVIGATION is the normal mode of operation providing full inertial data to the aircraft systems. ATTITUDE is a back-up mode, mainly providing attitude and heading information in case of loss of navigation capability. In ATT mode, the magnetic heading must be entered through the CDU and has to be updated frequently. T M U N A V 1 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 66 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION - SYSTEM SELECTOR T M U N A V 1 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 67 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION AIR DATA REFERENCE P/BSW The output buses of each air data reference are disconnected when its related pushbutton switch is set to OFF position. An amber FAULT light comes on accompanied by ECAM activation when a fault is detected in the related Air Data Reference. T M U N A V 1 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 68 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A V 1 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 69 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION DATA SELECTOR The Data Selector permits the display of the selected Inertial Reference data and status. T M U N A V 1 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 70 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION - DATA SELECTOR T M U N A V 1 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 71 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION - DATA DISPLAY T M U N A V 1 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 72 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION - STATUS MESSAGES T M U N A V 1 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 9 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 73 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U N A V 1 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
1 ADIRS CDU PRESENTATION - STATUS ACTION CODES EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 10 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 74 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION The inertial data, TK/GS, PPOS, WIND, HDG are available on: A - ATT only. B - NAV only. C - ATT or NAV. When does the ALIGN light flash? A - Within five minutes of NAV mode selection, when present position has not been entered. B - During the alignment phase in case of IRS alignment error. C - When alignment has been completed. T M U N A V 1 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 11 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 75 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A V 1 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 12 May 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 76 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS SWITCHING CONTENTS: General Principle Switching Example T M U N A V 2 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 77 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS SWITCHING GENERAL The Air Data Inertial Reference System (ADIRS) is composed of three Air Data Inertial Reference Units (ADIRUs) PRINCIPLE Various instruments and systems receive data from the ADIRS for inertial and air data display: - The Primary Flight Displays (PFDs), - The Navigation Displays (NDs), - The ECAM System Display (SD) - The Digital Distance and Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI). The ADIRS provides: - Barometric altitude to the Air Traffic Control (ATC) system for mode S. - Data to the Flight Augmentation Computers (FACs) for computation of various characteristic speeds. - Data to the Weather Radar (WR) system for antenna attitude stabilization. Basically, ADIRU1 is associated with systems 1 and the DDRMI, ADIRU2 with systems 2, ADIRU3 is in standby. If an Air Data Reference (ADR) or an Inertial Reference (IR) fails, the AIR DATA or ATT HDG selectors enable the crew to use ADR 3 or IR 3. The manual switching is mainly performed to recover displays. The computers select their inputs according to the switching for consistency of computation and display. NOTE: The ADIRU data sent to the ECAM System Display (E/SD) are Static Air Temperature (SAT) and Total Air Temperature (TAT). T M U N A V 2 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 78 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS SWITCHING T M U N A V 2 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 79 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS SWITCHING SWITCHING EXAMPLE Here is an example of ADIRS switching in order to see the effects on the schematic. T M U N A V 2 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 80 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS SWITCHING EXAMPLE T M U N A V 2 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 81 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A V 2 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 82 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRUS INTERCONNECTION CONTENTS: ADR to IR ADR to ADR ADR Switching IR Switching Switching Control Self Examination T M U A D I E 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 83 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRUS INTERCONNECTION ADR TO IR The ADR transmits information used to compute IR data. The ADR output buses are connected to the IR inputs respectively called internal (INT) A and B. Basically, each IR receives 3 ADR outputs, but uses its own ADR output for IR data computation. ADR TO ADR Each ADR receives air data computed by the two other ADRs to crosscheck its own data. The 4 parameters checked are: - static pressure, - total pressure, - Angle Of Attack (AOA), - Total Air Temperature (TAT). ADR SWITCHING When the Captain or First Officer ADR fails, the AIR DATA switch allows the crew to perform a manual switching to ADR3 to recover air data display. Note: The basic purpose of the AIR DATA/ATT HDG switching is to recover data display. IR SWITCHING When the Captain or First Officer IR fails, the attitude heading switch allows the crew to perform a manual switching to IR3 to recover inertial data display. When a manual switching is performed, the ADR associated to the failed IR is automatically switched to IR3 to maintain a computation/display homogeneity. If the associated ADR is not available, IR3 will work with ADR3. SWITCHING CONTROL Two discretes, AUTO and MANUAL, permit each IR to select a valid input. AUTO is always grounded for IR1 and IR2. The state of IR3 AUTO or MANUAL discrete depends on the selector position. As soon as an ADR fails, before manual switching, the air data display is lost but the associated IR automatically switches to ADR3 to ensure computation continuity as the internal bus is invalid. T M U A D I E 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 84 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRUS INTERCONNECTION T M U A D I E 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 85 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What must be done in case of ADR1 failure? A - Set AIR DATA switch to CAPT3 position. B - Set ATT HDG switch to CAPT3 position. C - Leave AIR DATA and ATT HDG switches on NORM position. What must be done in case of IR3 failure? A - Set AIR DATA switch to F/O3 position. B - Set ATT HDG switch to F/O3 position. C - Leave ATT HDG switch in NORM position. When AUTO discrete is grounded, where does the IR receive air data from? A - Input bus A. B - Input bus B. C - Internal bus, then from bus A, then from bus B depending on bus validity. T M U A D I E 0 1
L E V E L
3
EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 86 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-12-00 ADIRS ALIGNMENT THROUGH MCDU CONTENTS: ADIRS Alignment Through MCDU T M U A D I S 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 87 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ALIGNMENT THROUGH MCDU To perform the IRs alignment, select the FMGC then the INIT key. 1. To perform the three Inertial Reference alignments, the NAV position on the ADIRS CDU must be selected, and then the aircraft Present Position (PPOS) has to be entered. To send Present Position (PPOS) you can either enter a Company Route (CO RTE) or the Latitude (LAT) and Longitude (LONG) or a FROM/TO. We will here perform a FROM/TO insertion. For example LSGG/LGAT: - Departure from GENOVA, - Arrival at ATHENS. Use the keyboard to enter the LSGG/LGAT in the scratchpad and then the LS key 1R to valid it in the FROM/TO field. 2. The route corresponding to the chosen FROM/TO is displayed on the MCDU. In our example only one company route is available, insert it by using LS key 6R. 3. The return to the INIT page is automatic after route insertion. Now the FROM airport position is given on the LAT and LONG line. The ALIGN IRS prompt is displayed. As this airport position is preset, it can be modified according to the real aircraft position, this explains the arrows displayed on the LAT line, which indicate that the LAT can be changed using the slew keys. You can now initiate the 3 IRs alignment by pressing 3R key (ALIGN IRS). The present aircraft position will be automatically sent to the 3 IRs. 4. ALIGN IRS message has disappeared and IR alignment is now in progress (10 minutes). ON ADIRS CDU, ALIGN annunciators will go off. If ALIGN annunciators remain on or begin to flash it means that the IR alignment phase is unsuccessful. NOTE: If the INIT page A was left without having aligned the IRs, an IR ALIGN message will be displayed in the scratchpad. T M U A D I S 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 88 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I S 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 ADIRS ALIGNMENT THROUGH MCDU EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 89 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I S 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 90 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-12-00 ADIRS ALIGNMENT THROUGH CDU CONTENTS: ADIRS Alignment Through CDU T M U N A 1 0 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 1 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 91 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ALIGNMENT THROUGH CDU The aircraft is stationary on ground before take-off. The three mode selectors are in the OFF position, the ADIRUs are not energized. 1. When any mode selector is set to the NAV position, the amber ON BAT light comes on for five seconds and goes off. When the ON BAT light is off, the white ALIGN light comes on. NOTE: ALIGN light flashes if the aircraft position has not been entered 10 minutes after NAV mode selection (using MCDU or ADIRS CDU). The three selectors are in the NAV position, the IRs are waiting for aircrafts present position insertion. 2. When the SYS selector is in position 1, 2 or 3, the window display is energized and the system selected is ready for display. DATA display selector must be set to PPOS in order to enter the present position. 3. ADIRS CDU is now ready to accept the aircrafts present position (PPOS): TOULOUSE - BLAGNAC: N43-37-8, E122.6 Present Position LATITUDE: N43-37-8 The keyed latitude is displayed on the left side of the window display. The PPOS Latitude is entered into the 3 IRs which are in align mode whatever the system selected with the SYS selector. Present Position LONGITUDE: E1-22-6 The keyed longitude is displayed on the right side of the window display. The PPOS Longitude is entered into the 3 IRs, they are ready to be aligned. NOTE: If the actual PPOS is different by more than 1 degree in longitude and latitude from the previous one it must be keyed and entered twice. 4. The DATA selector is now set to the HDG position. The TTN (Time To Nav) indication gives the renaming time in minutes until completion alignment. The message IRS IN ALIGN appears on the MEMO page of the ECAM DU. True Heading (HDG) is displayed at TTN 5. When the alignment is completed, TTN indication disappears and all ALIGN lights go off. The 3 IRs are now aligned. T M U N A 1 0 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 2 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 92 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U N A 1 0 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 ADIRS ALIGNMENT THROUGH CDU EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 3 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 93 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A 1 0 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 4 Apr 16/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 94 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-12-00 ADIRS BACK-UP OPERATION (ATT MODE) CONTENTS: ADIRS Back-Up Operation (ATT Mode) T M U N A 1 1 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 1 Sep 30/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 95 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS BACK-UP OPERATION (ATT MODE) The ATTITUDE mode (ATT) is a back-up mode providing only attitude and magnetic heading information, in case of loss of navigation capability (temporary power cut-off or BITE failures causing excessive data errors in NAV mode). We will see here the case of an IR2 fault. 1. The single chime sounds, the MASTER CAUT comes on and the FAULT light on the ADIRS CDU flashes indicating an IR2 fault (HDG flag on PFD and ND and ATT on PFD). NAV IR2 FAULT message appears followed by: - ATT HDG SWTG... F/O3, on the ECAM DU telling the crew to switch to IR3 system. The IR2 fault is also confirmed by the following status message on ADIRS CDU when system 2 and STS are selected: - STS-SELECT ATT 2. When the ATT position is selected, the respective IR is in ATTITUDE mode. The FAULT light goes off, the ALIGN light comes on and then goes off (after 20 s). ATT MOD on the ADIRS CDU window indicates that you are in attitude mode (Pitch and Roll data again displayed on the EFIS). Note that the ATT mode must be engaged with aircraft in level flight. In ATT mode the crew can insert a magnetic heading. In order to perform the HEADING insertion, the DATA selector must be set to the HDG position. 3. When the DATA selector is in the HDG and the SYS selector is in position 2,the magnetic heading can be keyed and entered into IR2. When the H key is selected the green ENT and CLR lights come on. HDG appears in the window display. The magnetic HDG which is 353.9 is typed on the keyboard. NOTE: the magnetic heading is indicated on the instruments. 4. The ENT key is used to send the magnetic heading to IR2, when done the ENT and CLR lights go off. The IR2 is now in ATTITUDE mode and mainly sends attitude and heading data. If the IR2 had to be used again, the crew should take into account the gyro drift and update frequently the HDG reference. T M U N A 1 1 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 2 Sep 30/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 96 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U N A 1 1 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 ADIRS BACK-UP OPERATION (ATT MODE) EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 3 Sep 30/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 97 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A 1 1 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-12-00 Page 4 Sep 30/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 98 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD CONTENTS: Attitude Heading Airspeed Vertical Speed Altitude Self Examination T M U A D I H 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 99 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD ATTITUDE The inertial attitude data is displayed by a sphere in the middle of the Primary Flight Display (PFD). 1. PITCH SCALE The aircraft pitch angle is given by the displacement of the pitch attitude scale (white) through a display window. For pitch angles of more than 25 or than - 13, the guidance symbols and the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) are removed. 2. ROLL SCALE The fixed roll scale (white) comprises roll graduations. For roll angles of more than 45 the guidance symbols and the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) are removed. 3. ROLL INDEX The roll index (yellow) attached to the sphere moves along the fixed roll scale and provides the roll data (Aircraft bank angle). T M U A D I H 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 100 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I H 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD - ATTITUDE (SHEET 1/2) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 101 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD 4. FLIGHT PATH VECTOR The flight path vector (green) indicates the actual aircraft inertial trajectory. The flight path vector is used as a reference when the Flight Director (FD) is engaged in TRACK/FLIGHT PATH ANGLE mode (TRK/FPA). 5. DISCREPANCY When an attitude discrepancy is detected between the Captain display and the First Officer display, an amber CHECK ATT message is displayed on both PFDs associated with aural and visual ECAM cautions. The attitude discrepancy threshold is 5. This discrepancy is detected by comparison of the 2 IRSs in use within the Flight Warning Computer (FWC). 6. FAILURE In case of attitude failure, the attitude sphere is cleared and replaced by an attitude flag (ATT red). The red ATT flag first flashes then remains steady. The failure is detected by the associated Air Data Inertial Reference Unit (ADIRU). T M U A D I H 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 102 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD - ATTITUDE (SHEET 2/2) T M U A D I H 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 103 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD HEADING The magnetic heading is displayed in the lower section of the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and with a white heading scale on the horizon line. 1. HEADING SCALES Two moving heading scales (white) provide the crew with heading data. 2. HEADING REFERENCE LINE A fixed heading reference line (yellow) shows the actual heading on the lower heading scale. 3. ACTUAL TRACK SYMBOL The diamond shaped symbol (green) indicates the Actual Track. 4. TRUE HEADING TRU (white) indicates that true heading is displayed instead of magnetic heading (automatically when latitude above 73 north or below 60 south for polar navigation). 5. DISCREPANCY When a heading discrepancy is detected between the Captain display and the First Officer display, an amber CHECK HDG message is displayed on both PFDs associated with aural and visual ECAM cautions. The heading discrepancy threshold is 5. This discrepancy is detected by a comparison of the 2 IRs in use within the Flight Warning Computers (FWC). 6. FAILURE In case of heading failure, the graduations from the two scales disappear and are replaced on the lower scale by the red HDG flag. The red HDG flag first flashes then remains steady. The failure is detected by the associated ADIRU. T M U A D I H 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 104 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD - HEADING T M U A D I H 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 105 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD AIRSPEED The Computed Airspeed (CAS),given by the ADR, is displayed on the left hand side of the PFD. 1. AIRSPEED SCALE A moving airspeed scale (white) with graduations in knots provides the crew with airspeed information. Airspeed display starts/stops at 30 kts. Below 30 kts, the CAS label is set to NCD (No Computed Data). The speed scale is graduated from 30 to 520 kts. 2. AIRSPEED REFERENCE LINE A fixed airspeed reference line (yellow) shows the actual airspeed on the airspeed scale. The MACH number (green) is displayed if above 0.5 M and no ILS selection. It disappears at 0.45 M. 3. FAILURE In case of airspeed failure, the airspeed scale is replaced by the red SPD flag. The red SPD flag first flashes then remains steady. In case of mach failure, the mach number is replaced by the red MACH flag. T M U A D I H 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 106 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD - AIRSPEED T M U A D I H 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 9 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 107 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD VERTICAL SPEED The inertial Vertical Speed (V/S) is displayed on the right hand side of the Primary Flight Display. 1. V/S SCALE A vertical speed scale (white) with graduations in feet per minute, provides the crew with vertical speed information. 2. V/S POINTER A pointer (green) provides the vertical speed in analog form. The pointer rotates around a point outside the V/S scale. Only the portion of the needle inside the scale is displayed. 3. NUMERICAL VALUE Above a V/S threshold, a numerical value (green) in hundreds of feet per minute comes into view and follows the pointer. 4. EXCESSIVE V/S In case of excessive vertical speed, the digital and analog indications become amber. Excessive V/S when: - V/S > 6000 ft/mn or V/s < - 6000 ft/mn, - V/S < - 2000 ft/mn when 1000 < RA Height < 2500 ft, - V/S < - 1200 ft/mn below 1000 ft RA Height. 5. DEGRADED DATA When the inertial vertical speed is not available, the baro vertical speed is automatically displayed. An amber box surrounds the numerical value. 6. FAILURE In case of vertical speed failure, the scale is replaced by the red V/S flag. T M U A D I H 0 1 - T 0 5
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 10 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 108 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD - VERTICAL SPEED T M U A D I H 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 11 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 109 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD ALTITUDE The Altitude is displayed on the right hand side of the Primary Flight Display. 1. ALTITUDE SCALE A moving altitude scale (white) with graduations every hundred feet provides the crew with altitude information. 2. ALTITUDE INDICATION The aircraft altitude is shown in a window (yellow) by a counter for hundreds of feet and a drum for tens and units. 3. BARO REFERENCE The baro reference can be standard (STD), QNH or QFE (optional)(white) according to the selection made on the EFIS control panel. 4. DISCREPANCY When an altitude discrepancy is detected between the Captain display and the First Officer display, an amber CHECK ALT message is displayed on both PFDs associated with aural and visual ECAM cautions. The Altitude discrepancy threshold is: - 250 ft with baro selected (QNH or QFE), - 500 ft with STD selected. This discrepancy is detected by comparison of the 2 ADRs in use within the Flight Warning Computers (FWC). 5. FAILURE In case of altitude failure, the altitude scale is replaced by the red ALT flag. The red ALT flag first flashes then remains steady. The failure is detected by the associated ADIRU. T M U A D I H 0 1 - T 0 6
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 12 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 110 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON PFD - ALTITUDE T M U A D I H 0 1 - P 0 6
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 13 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 111 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What is displayed if the inertial vertical speed is not available? A - A red V/S flag comes on. B - A degraded V/S data provided by ADR. C - Nothing. What information is displayed on the airspeed scale? A - CAS from ADR. B - CAS from ADR mixed with inertial speed. C - CAS from ADR, inertial speed if ADR failure. What happens if an altitude failure occurs? A - The altitude scale goes out of view. B - A red ALT flag is displayed. C - A and B. T M U A D I H 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 14 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 112 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND CONTENTS: ROSE Mode ARC Mode PLAN Mode Self Examination T M U A D I I 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 113 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND ROSE MODE The ROSE mode provides a 360 degree sector (compass rose) around the fixed aircraft symbol (yellow). 1. SPEED The speed information (green) is displayed in the left upper corner. The True Airspeed (TAS) is displayed for speeds higher than 100 kts. 2. WIND The wind information (green) is displayed in the left upper corner showing force and direction. 3. HEADING The magnetic heading is read on a full rotating dial, on a fixed lubber line (yellow). A TRU (white) message is displayed when in true heading instead of magnetic heading in polar areas. A diamond shaped symbol (green) indicates the aircraft actual track. 4. DISCREPANCY When a heading (HDG) discrepancy occurs between the Captain and First Officer Navigation Displays (NDs), an amber CHECK HDG message is displayed on both NDs associated with aural and visual ECAM cautions. The heading (HDG) discrepancy threshold is 5. This discrepancy is detected by comparison of the 2 IRS in use within the Flight Warning Computer (FWC). 5. FAILURE When a heading failure is detected, a HDG red flag is displayed. The red HDG flag first flashes then remains steady. T M U A D I I 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 114 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I I 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND - ROSE MODE EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 115 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND ARC MODE The ARC mode provides a 90 degree sector ahead of the fixed aircraft symbol. 1. SPEED The speed information (green) is displayed in the left upper corner. The True Airspeed (TAS) is displayed for speeds higher than 100 kts. 2. WIND The wind information (green) is displayed in the left upper corner showing force and direction. 3. HEADING The magnetic heading (white) is read on a partial rotating dial, on a fixed lubber line. A TRU (white) message is displayed when in true heading instead of magnetic heading in polar areas. A diamond shaped symbol (green) indicates the aircraft actual track. 4. DISCREPANCY When a heading (HDG) discrepancy occurs between the Captain and First Officer Navigation Displays (NDs), an amber CHECK HDG message is displayed on both NDs associated with aural and visual ECAM cautions. The Heading (HDG) discrepancy threshold is 5. This discrepancy is detected by comparison of the 2 IRs in use within the Flight Warning Computer (FWC). 5. FAILURE When a heading failure is detected, a red HDG flag is displayed. The red HDG flag first flashes then remains steady. T M U A D I I 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 116 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND - ARC MODE T M U A D I I 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 117 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND PLAN MODE The PLAN mode provides a map display centered automatically on the active waypoint or any other waypoint of the flight plan after pilot action on the MCDU. 1. SPEED The speed information (green) is displayed in the left upper corner. The True Airspeed (TAS) is displayed for speeds higher than 100 kts. 2. WIND The wind information (green) is displayed in the left upper corner. 3. HEADING The map displayed (white) is referenced to north up. T M U A D I I 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 118 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ND - PLAN MODE T M U A D I I 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 119 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION A heading discrepancy between the NDs is detected by? A - FWCs. B - DMCs. C - ADIRS. How is the drift angle indicated? A - By a diamond shaped symbol rotating on the heading dial. B - By the difference between heading reference and actual track symbol. C - A or B, according to information validity. T M U A D I I 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 120 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ECAM DISPLAY UNIT CONTENTS: Total Air Temperature/Static Air Temperature Failure Switching Self Examination T M U A D I N 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 121 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ECAM DISPLAY UNIT TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE/STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE The Total Air Temperature (TAT) (Green) and Static Air Temperature (SAT) (Green) are permanently displayed. TAT range: - 60C + 99C, SAT range: - 99C + 80C. FAILURE In case of failure or when no computed data information is received, the data is replaced by amber crosses. SWITCHING Basically, ADR2 provides data. ADR3 provides data when the AIR DATA switch is set to First Officer 3 (F/O 3). Back up data is provided by setting the AIR DATA switch to the F/O 3 position. T M U A D I N 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 122 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I N 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 ADIRS INDICATIONS ON ECAM DISPLAY UNIT EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 123 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION The TAT and SAT data is provided by? A - ADR1 or ADR3. B - ADR2 or ADR3. C - ADR1 or ADR2. T M U A D I N 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 124 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS CONTENTS: General ADR 1 or 2 Fault ADR 3 Fault IR 1 or 2 Fault IR 3 Fault Overspeed Stall Warning ATT Discrepancy HDG Discrepancy ALT Discrepancy T M U A D I R 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 125 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS GENERAL The ADIRS warning messages are shown on the lower part of the upper ECAM display unit. IMPORTANT: Although the ADIRS warnings are amber, they are directly computed by the FWC from ADIRU data. T M U A D I R 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 126 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - ADR 1 OR 2 FAULT T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 127 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - ADR 3 FAULT T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 128 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - IR 1 OR 2 FAULT T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 129 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - IR 3 FAULT T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 130 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - OVERSPEED T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 131 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - STALL WARNING T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 132 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - ATT DISCREPANCY T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 7
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 9 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 133 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - HDG DISCREPANCY T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 8
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 10 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 134 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS ECAM WARNINGS - ALT DISCREPANCY T M U A D I R 0 1 - P 0 9
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 11 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 135 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I R 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 12 Oct 31/94 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 136 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-20-00 STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS CONTENTS: Airspeed Indicator Altimeter Compass Horizon Indicator VOR/DME RMI Metric Altimeter (Option) VOR/ADF/DME RMI (Option) ADF/RMI (Option) T M U A D I J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 137 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS AIRSPEED INDICATOR IDENTIFICATION FIN: 9FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The standby Airspeed Indicator(ASI) contains a capsule operated mechanism which measures the pitot/static pressure differential from the standby static probes and the standby pitot. An integral lighting supplied with external 5VAC is provided to illuminate the instrument. ALTIMETER IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The standby altimeter is supplied with static pressure by the standby probes to indicate the barometric altitude of the aircraft. An integral lighting with external 5VAC is provided to illuminate the instrument. T M U A D I J 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 138 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS - AIRSPEED INDICATOR - ALTIMETER T M U A D I J 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 139 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS COMPASS IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The magnetic compass, installed on the top of the windshield center part, is an independent instrument which provides the crew with the aircrafts magnetic heading. NOTE: The calibration of the compass must be done after the radio receivers are switched on. T M U A D I J 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 140 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS - COMPASS T M U A D I J 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 141 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS HORIZON INDICATOR IDENTIFICATION FIN: 7FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The gyroscopic horizon, installed on the center instrument panel, is an independent instrument which provides the crew with a constant indication of the aircrafts attitude. VOR/DME RMI IDENTIFICATION FIN: 11FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The VOR/DME Radio Magnetic Indicator (VOR/DME RMI) installed on the center instrument panel, uses digital ARINC 429 type inputs. It receives parameters from ADIRUs, VORs and DMEs for the display of: - Magnetic or true heading, - VOR bearings, - DME distances. T M U A D I J 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 142 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS - HORIZON INDICATOR - VOR/DME RMI T M U A D I J 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 143 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS METRIC ALTIMETER (OPTION) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 15FN LOCATION ZONE: 211 DESCRIPTION The metric altimeter is supplied with static pressure by the standby air data to indicate the barometric altitude of the aircraft in meters. An integral lighting with external 5VAC is provided to illuminate the instrument. VOR/ADF/DME RMI (OPTION) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 21FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 DESCRIPTION The VOR/ADF/DME Radio Magnetic Indicator (VOR/ADF/DME RMI) installed on the center instrument panel, uses digital ARINC 429 type inputs. It receives parameters from ADIRUs, VORs, ADFs and DMEs for the display of: - Magnetic or true heading, - VOR bearings, - ADF bearings, - DME distances. T M U A D I J 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 144 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS - METRIC ALTIMETER AND VOR/ADF/DME RMI (OPTIONS) T M U A D I J 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 9 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 145 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS ADF/RMI (OPTION) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 13FN LOCATION: ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ADF Radio Magnetic Indicator (ADF/RMI) installed on the center instrument panel, uses digital ARINC 429 type inputs. It receives parameters from ADIRUs and ADFs for the display of: - Magnetic or true heading, - ADF bearings. T M U A D I J 0 1 - T 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 10 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 146 EFFECTIVITY ALL STANDBY INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS - ADF/RMI (OPTION) T M U A D I J 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 11 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 147 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-20-00 Page 12 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 148 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS COMPONENTS CONTENTS: Air Data Module AOA Sensors Static Probes TAT Sensors Pitot Probes ADIRS CDU ADIRUs VMO/MMO Switch T M U A D I O 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 149 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS AIR DATA MODULE IDENTIFICATION FIN: 19FP1, 19FP2, 19FP3, 19FP4 19FP5, 19FP6, 19FP7, 19FP8 LOCATION ZONE: 121, 125, 126, 127, 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ADMs are near and above the level of the pitot and static probes, this to permit the ADM pneumatic plumbing to be self draining (except stby static line). AOA SENSORS IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3FP1, 3FP2, 3FP3 LOCATION ZONE: 127, 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The AOA sensor is of the windvane type. The sensing element is a small wing, positioned in the airflow direction, linked to a free turning shaft. T M U A D I O 0 3 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 150 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I O 0 3 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 ADIRS COMPONENTS - ADMs AND AOAS EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 151 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS STATIC PROBES IDENTIFICATION FIN: 7DA1, 7DA2, 7DA3 8DA1, 8DA2, 8DA3 LOCATION ZONE: 121, 122, 127, 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The probes are protected from icing by a heater circuit. TAT SENSORS IDENTIFICATION FIN: 11FP1, 11FP2 LOCATION ZONE: 121, 122 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION There are 2 sensing elements in each sensor. The TAT sensors are heated through the Probe Heating Computer (PHC). The heating element must not be energized on the ground. NOTE: The second sensing element on the TAT 2 sensor is not used. T M U A D I O 0 3 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 152 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS - STATIC PROBES AND TATS T M U A D I O 0 3 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 153 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS PITOT PROBES IDENTIFICATION FIN: 9DA1, 9DA2, 9DA3 LOCATION ZONE: 125, 126 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The probes are protected from icing by a heater circuit. ADIRS CDU IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2FP LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ADIRS CDU is located on overhead panel 20VU. It contains 3 identical connectors, each connector is linked to one ADIRU. T M U A D I O 0 3 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 154 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS - PITOT PROBES AND ADIRS CDU T M U A D I O 0 3 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 155 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS ADIRUs IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1FP1, 1FP2, 1FP3 LOCATION ZONE: 127, 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ADIRU is contained in a 4 MCU case as defined in ARINC 600. The ADIRU contains an ADR and an IR portion supplied by a common power source. VMO/MMO SWITCH IDENTIFICATION FIN: 22FP LOCATION ZONE: 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION This switch is selected for particular flights with the landing gear down (Ferry flights for example). It allows the ADR to determine the normal or alternate VMO/MMO law. T M U A D I O 0 3 - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 156 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS COMPONENTS - ADIRUS AND VMO/MMO SWITCH T M U A D I O 0 3 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 9 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 157 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I O 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 10 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 158 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-36-00 MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General ILS Principle GPS Principle Components ILS Indicating GPS Indicating Self Examination T M U M M R A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 1 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 159 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION GENERAL The Multi Mode Receiver (MMR) system is a Navigation Sensor with 2 internal receivers. MMR = ILS + GPS ILS PRINCIPLE The function of the Instrument Landing System (ILS) is to provide the crew and airborne system users with signals transmitted by a ground station. A descent axis is determined by the intersection of a Localizer beam (LOC) and a Glide Slope beam (G/S) created by this ground station at known frequencies. The ILS allows measurement and display of angular deviations and receives the Morse audio signal which identifies the ILS ground station. ILS operational frequency range: - LOC: between 108.1 and 111.95 MHz, - G/S: between 329.15 and 335 MHz. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 2 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 160 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - ILS PRINCIPLE T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 3 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 161 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION GPS PRINCIPLE The NAVigation System Time And Ranging Global Positioning System ( NAV.S.T.A.R. GPS ) is a worldwide navigation radio aid which uses satellite signals to provide accurate navigation information. The architecture of the system is composed of 3 parts called segments: - Spatial Segment - Control Segment - User Segment SPATIAL SEGMENT The spatial segment is composed of a constellation of 24 satellites. These satellites are arranged in six separate orbital planes of four satellites each on a circular orbit and have the following characteristics: - 55 inclination to the Equator, - an altitude of approx 20200 km with an orbital period of 12 sideral hours. These satellites give: - the satellite position (Ephemeris of the constellation), - the constellation data (Almanach). - the atmospheric corrections. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 4 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 162 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - GPS PRINCIPLE - SPATIAL SEGMENT T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 5 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 163 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION GPS PRINCIPLE (Continued) CONTROL SEGMENT The control segment is composed of four monitor stations and one master control station which track the satellites, compute the ephemeris, clock corrections and control the navigation parameters and transmit them to the GPS users. The four monitor stations are located at: - KWAJALEIN - HAWAII - ASCENCION ISLAND - DIEGO GARCIA The master control station is located at: - COLORADO SPRINGS. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 6 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 164 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - GPS PRINCIPLE - CONTROL SEGMENT T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 7 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 165 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION GPS PRINCIPLE (Continued) USER SEGMENT The principle of GPS position computation is based on the measurement of transmission time of the GPS signals broadcast by at least 4 satellites. This segment is constitued by the GPS receiver and defined as follows: - signal acquisition, - distance calculation, - navigation computation (Satellite choice, positioning, propagation corrections), - detection and isolation of failed satellites (GPS PRIMARY). NOTE: When GPS mode is active, no VOR/DME/ADF data is used for navigation. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 8 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 166 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - GPS PRINCIPLE - USER SEGMENT EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 9 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 167 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The components are two ILS antennas, 2 GPS antennas and two MMR units. The MMR system is also connected to: - Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Navigation Display (ND) for display. - Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) control unit for display control. - Flight Management and Guidance Computer (FMGC) for ILS auto-tuning and GPS position. - Multipurpose Control Display Units (MCDU) for ILS manual tuning. - Captain and First Officer Radio Management Panels (RMP) for ILS back-up tuning. - Audio Control Panels (ACP) for ILS audio signal. - Air Data and Inertial Reference Unit for GPIR data. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 10 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 168 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 11 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 169 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION ILS INDICATING The ILS data appears on the PFD as soon as the ILS pushbutton switch on the EFIS control panel has been pressed in and on the ND when ROSE/ILS mode has been selected. ILS information is displayed in magenta. The ILS1 information is displayed on PFD1 and ND2. The ILS2 information is displayed on PFD2 and ND1. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 6
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 12 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 170 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - ILS INDICATING T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 6
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 13 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 171 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION GPS INDICATING The GPS data is displayed on the MCDUs and on the NDs. - GPS data on MCDU (GPS MONITOR page): * GPS position (Lat, Long) * True Track * GPS altitude * Figure of Merit * Ground Speed * Number of satellites tracked * Mode. - GPS message on ND: * Availability of the GPS Primary navigation function. T M U M M R A 0 1 - T 0 7
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 14 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 172 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R A 0 1 - P 0 7
L E V E L
1 MMR SYSTEM PRESENTATION - GPS INDICATING EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 15 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 173 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION The satellite orbital planes have an inclination of: A - 60. B - 55 to the Equator. C - 45 to the Equator. The control segment is composed of: A - 3 monitor stations. B - 5 monitor stations. C - 4 monitor stations and one master control station. T M U M M R A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 16 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 174 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-36-00 MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General ILS Function GPS Function LGCIU CFDIU Users Indicating Self Examination T M U M M R C 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 1 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 175 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Multi Mode Receiver (MMR) system includes: - 2 MMR units, - 1 Glide Slope (G/S) antenna, - 1 Localizer (LOC) antenna, - 2 GPS antennas. ILS FUNCTION AUTO TUNING In normal operation, each Flight Management and Guidance Computer (FMGC) automaticaLly tunes its ownside ILS part (Port A) of the MMR unit through its ownside Radio Management Panel (RMP). If an FMGC failure occurs, a discrete (A/B switching) changes the tuning port (Port B) of the MMR unit, which is directly connected to the opposite FMGC. MANUAL TUNING From each Multipurpose Control and Display Unit (MCDU) both MMR units can be manually tuned through their ownside FMGC. NOTE: To return to the auto tuning mode, the manual mode has to be cleared. BACK-UP TUNING In case of failure of both FMGCs, a back-up tuning is provided by RMP 1 and 2. Either RMP controls both MMR units, if STBY NAV mode is activated on RMP 1 and 2 (RMP 3 not used for navaids tuning). In emergency electrical configuration RMP 1 only is supplied. ANTENNAS The Glide Slope (G/S) and Localizer (LOC) antennas are common to both MMR units. Each antenna has two independent connectors, for each MMR units. T M U M M R C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 2 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 176 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION - DATA ACQUISITION T M U M M R C 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 3 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 177 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GPS FUNCTION GPS OPERATION The Global Positioning System (GPS) function is achieved by a stand alone satellite navigation sensor using the U.S GPS satellites constellation. The GPS primary function is to track the RF signals received from the satellites and compute its own position and output the GPS data to the 3 ADIRUs. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) or Autonomous Integrity Monitored Extrapolation (AIME) provide integrity and availability of this data. The GPS provides three dimensional aircraft position, velocities and exact time used for hybrid computations by the 3 ADIRUs. In case of failure of one GPS, the ADIRU automatically selects the only operative GPS to compute hybrid GPIR data. ANTENNAS The GPS antenna is an L-band active antenna, with an integrated preamplifier and filter, providing an omnidirectional upper hemispheric coverage. The GPS antenna operates at a frequency of 1575.42 Mhz called L1. A second frequency of 1227.6 Mhz, called L2, is used to estimate the propagation error of L1 and to suppress it. ADIRU To reduce initialization time, MMR unit 1 and 2 receive position data (lat, long), time and date from the associated ADIRU. In case of failure of ADIRU2 the primary source of ADIRU3 being GPS1, it is necessary to select the second input port of ADIRU3 (GPS2) by means of the ATT/HDG switching to preserve the side 1/side 2 segregation. - MMR1/ADIRU1/FMGC1, - MMR2/ADIRU3/FMGC2. FMGC The IR portion of ADIRU1 or 2 provides FMGC1 or 2 with pure IR data, pure GPS data and hybrid GPIR data for position fixing. The FMGC position is a mix of the hybrid GPS/IRS position and the mixed IR position. NOTE: As long as GPS/IRS mode is active, radio updating DME/DME or VOR/DME is not allowed. LGCIU Each Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU) sends a Ground/Flight discrete signal which is used by the receiver BITE module to count the flight legs in case of CFDIU failure. T M U M M R C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 4 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 178 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R C 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION - DATA ACQUISITION EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 5 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 179 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CFDIU The Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU) enables tests and trouble shooting to be carried out on the MMR system using the MCDU. The test can be done only on ground. USERS The MMR data is sent to the FMGCs for aircraft guidance during take off, approach and landing phases. The MMR data is also sent to the ECAM for warnings. The MMR 1 data is send to the Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) for mode 5 computation (Descent below GS). NOTE: A discrete signal sent by the FMGC inhibits any frequency change in the MMR unit when LAND mode is armed below 700 ft. INDICATING The ILS 1 data is sent, through the Display Management Computers (DMCs), to the CAPT PFD and F/O ND and the ILS 2 data is sent to the F/O PFD and CAPT ND. An audio signal is also processed by the MMR unit (ILS part) and sent to the Audio Management Unit (AMU) so that it can be heard by the crew. Pure GPS data is available for display only on the GPS MONITOR page of the MCDUs. Operational messages may also be displayed on the NDs. T M U M M R C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 6 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 180 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R C 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 MMR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION - MONITORING AND DISPLAY EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 7 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 181 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION Which ILS receiver provides the Ground Proximity Warning Computer with data? A - ILS 2 receiver. B - ILS 1 receiver. C - ILS 1 and ILS 2 receivers. Where is ILS 2 data displayed? A - On Capt ND and F/O PFD. B - On Capt PFD and F/O ND. C - On F/O PFD and F/O ND. The primary source of ADIRU3 is: A - GPS2. B - GPS1. C - GPS1 and 2. The IR portion of the ADIRU provides the FMGC with: A - IR data, pure GPS data and hybrid GPIR data. B - VOR/DME data. C - only GPS data. T M U M M R C 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 8 Nov 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 182 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-36-00 MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD CONTENTS: ILS Pushbutton ILS Characteristics Vertical Deviation Lateral Deviation Flags Self Examination T M U M M R E 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 183 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD ILS PUSHBUTTON The ILS data is displayed on the PFD if the ILS pushbutton is switched on the Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) control panel. ILS CHARACTERISTICS The ILS characteristics are displayed in magenta in the bottom left corner of the PFD. The ILS identification is displayed after decoding by the ILS receiver. An amber ILS message flashes when APPR mode has been armed and ILS display not selected. T M U M M R E 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 184 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R E 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD - ILS PUSHBUTTON AND CHARACTERISTICS EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 185 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD VERTICAL DEVIATION The vertical deviation index (magenta) is associated with the Glide/Slope (G/S) beam reception. The vertical scale and the vertical index flash when the deviation is excessive. When the deviation is out of range, the vertical index is against one stop and only its outer half remains in view. LATERAL DEVIATION The lateral deviation index (magenta) is associated with the Localizer (LOC) beam reception. The lateral scale and the lateral index flash when the deviation is excessive. When the deviation is out of range, the lateral index is against one stop and only its outer half remains in view. The ILS course is represented by a magenta course pointer on the heading scale. T M U M M R E 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 186 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD - VERTICAL AND LATERAL DEVIATION T M U M M R E 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 187 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD FLAGS In case of failure, a corresponding flag is shown in red: - if a LOC or G/S receiver fails, a red LOC or G/S flag appears on the corresponding deviation scale. - if both LOC and G/S signals have failed, an ILS 1 (or 2) flag is also displayed. T M U M M R E 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 188 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON PFD - FLAGS T M U M M R E 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 189 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION When do the G/S and LOC scales appear on the PFD? A - When the ILS pushbutton is selected. B - When G/S and LOC beams are received. C - A and B. When does the lateral deviation scale flash? A - When the LOCALIZER receiver is faulty. B - When the deviation is excessive. C - When the aircraft is out of range. When does the red ILS flag appear? A - When both LOC and G/S signals have failed. B - When ILS frequency is not available. C - When the ILS is not selected on the FCU. T M U M M R E 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 190 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-36-00 MMR INDICATIONS ON ND CONTENTS: ILS Data GPS Data Self Examination T M U M M R G 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 191 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON ND ILS DATA DATA DISPLAY All the indications are displayed in ROSE-ILS mode. Only the ILS course pointer (magenta) is displayed in ROSE-NAV or ARC mode if the ILS pushbutton is selected on EFIS control panel. ILS CHARACTERISTICS In ROSE-ILS mode, the ILS characteristics are displayed in magenta, in the top right corner of the ND. The ILS identification is displayed after decoding by the ILS receiver. The ILS information is crossed over on the NDs (ILS 1 on ND 2; ILS 2 on ND 1). A green ILS APP message appears on the top middle of the ND when an ILS approach has been selected on the MCDU. T M U M M R G 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 192 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R G 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 MMR INDICATIONS ON ND - ILS DATA - DATA AND ILS CHARACTERISTICS EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 193 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON ND ILS DATA VERTICAL DEVIATION The vertical deviation index (magenta) is associated with the Glide/Slope (G/S) beam reception. The vertical scale (white) and the vertical index (G/S) flash when the deviation is excessive. When the deviation is out of range, the vertical index is against one stop and only its outer half remains in view. LATERAL DEVIATION The lateral deviation bar (magenta) is associated with the Localizer (LOC) beam reception. The lateral scale (white) and the lateral bar (LOC) flash if the deviation is excessive. The lateral bar, corresponding to the center part of the ILS course pointer (magenta), can move on the deviation scale and gives the Localizer deviation. T M U M M R G 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 194 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON ND - ILS DATA - VERTICAL AND LATERAL DEVIATIONS T M U M M R G 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 195 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON ND ILS DATA FLAGS In ROSE-ILS mode, if a failure occurs, a corresponding flag is displayed in red. In case of ILS failure, the ILS course pointer becomes red and points to 12 oclock and the lateral bar is removed. T M U M M R G 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 196 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON ND - ILS DATA - FLAGS T M U M M R G 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 197 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR INDICATIONS ON ND GPS DATA GPS data indications are displayed in all ND modes. A green GPS APP message appears on the top middle of the ND when a GPS approach has been selected in the MCDU. When, for any reason, the GPS primary navigation is lost, the navigation function is degraded and reverts to traditional navigation function (IRS, Radio Nav ...). An amber GPS PRIMARY LOST message is also displayed at the bottom of the ND. In turn when the GPS is used by the FMGC for navigation, the GPS PRIMARY message is displayed in white at the bottom of the ND. T M U M M R G 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 198 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R G 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
2 MMR INDICATIONS ON ND - GPS DATA EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 9 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 199 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What is displayed in ROSE-NAV mode when the ILS pushbutton is selected on the EFIS control panel? A - An ILS course pointer. B - A lateral deviation bar. C - A and B. How is the excessive deviation displayed on vertical scale? A - The Glide/Slope index disappears. B - A red "G/S" symbol appears in the middle of the scale. C - The Glide/Slope index and the scale flash permanently. T M U M M R G 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 10 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 200 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-36-00 MMR COMPONENTS CONTENTS: MMR Unit Glide/Slope Antenna Localizer Antenna GPS Antenna T M U M M R J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 1 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 201 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR COMPONENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Before working on the ILS antennas, put a warning notice in the cockpit, on the pedestal, to tell persons not to operate the radar system. MMR UNIT IDENTIFICATION FIN: 40RT1, 40RT2 LOCATION ZONE: 120 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the MMR unit is fitted with four LEDs and a TEST pushbutton. When the TEST pushbutton is pressed in, the functional test starts, the 4 LEDS come on. If the test is OK, the green TEST OK LED comes on, the other LEDs should go off when the TEST pushbutton is released. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U M M R J 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 2 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 202 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U M M R J 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 MMR COMPONENTS - MMR UNIT EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 3 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 203 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR COMPONENTS GLIDE/SLOPE ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION FIN: 4RT LOCATION ZONE: 110 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The Glide/Slope (G/S) antenna is a folded half loop type driven by capacitance coupling. The G/S antenna is horizontally polarized and has an impedance of 50 ohms. The antenna has two independent RF connectors used to feed two independent ILS receivers. LOCALIZER ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3RT LOCATION ZONE: 110 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The Localizer (LOC) antenna is a folded half loop type driven by capacitance coupling. The LOC antenna is horizontally polarized and has an impedance of 50 ohms. The antenna has two independent RF connectors used to feed two independent ILS receivers. T M U M M R J 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 4 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 204 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR COMPONENTS - GLIDE/SLOPE AND LOCALIZER ANTENNAS T M U M M R J 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 5 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 205 EFFECTIVITY ALL GPS ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION FIN: 43RT1, 43RT2 LOCATION ZONE: 210 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The GPS antenna is an active antenna with an integrated preamplifier and filter and has a right hand circular polarized and omnidirectional radiation pattern. A 50 ohm impedance coaxial cable connects the antenna to the MMR. The power supply of the preamplifier is provided by the MMR unit. T M U M M R J 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 6 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 206 EFFECTIVITY ALL MMR COMPONENTS - GPS ANTENNA T M U M M R J 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 7 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 207 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U M M R J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-36-00 Page 8 Sep 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 208 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-41-00 WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General Weather Radar (WR) Principle Predictive Windshear (PWS) Principle (Option) Components WR Indicating PWS Indicating (Option) Self Examination T M U W P W A 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 209 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION GENERAL The Airborne Weather Radar and Predictive Windshear System (WR/PWS) detects and localizes atmospheric disturbances and windshear events in the area scanned by the antenna. Note: The PWS (Predictive Windshear System) function is optional. WEATHER RADAR (WR) PRINCIPLE The WR helps the pilots to avoid these areas and the associated turbulences by determining their range and bearing. It can also be used for ground mapping. The radar emits microwave pulses through a directive antenna which picks up the return signals. The distance is determined by the time taken for the echo to return. The azimuth is given by the antenna position when the echo is received. T M U W P W A 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 210 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION - WEATHER RADAR (WR) PRINCIPLE T M U W P W A 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 211 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR (PWS) PRINCIPLE (OPTION) A windshear event is a sudden change of wind speed and/or direction over a small distance due to downwards and/or upwards movement of the air. The most critical moment for the aircraft is near the ground level during the approach or in take-off. T M U W P W A 0 2 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 212 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W A 0 2 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR (PWS) PRINCIPLE EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 213 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The main components are an antenna, a wave guide, a transceiver and a control unit. The WR/PWS system is also connected to the Navigation Displays (NDs) via the DMCs for display. Note: The control panels shown here after are given as examples. They may differ according to your aircraft configuration. T M U W P W A 0 2 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 214 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W A 0 2 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 215 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION WR INDICATING The Weather Radar image is shown on the Captain and First Officer Navigation Displays. Radar image and radar information status (TILT, GAIN, failure) are displayed in the different EFIS modes (ARC and ROSE) except in PLAN mode. PWS INDICATING (OPTION) The Predictive Windshear indications are shown on the Captain and F/O PFDs and NDs. The windshear phenomenon is indicated by an icon superimposed on the radar image in the different EFIS modes (ARC and ROSE) except in PLAN mode. T M U W P W A 0 2 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 216 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS SYSTEM PRESENTATION - WR AND PWS INDICATING T M U W P W A 0 2 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 217 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION Windshear indications are shown: A - Only on the NDs. B - On the PFDs and the NDs. C - On the Upper ECAM DU. T M U W P W A 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 218 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-41-00 WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General System Description System Interfaces Indicating Self Examination T M U W P W C 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 219 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Weather Radar and Predictive Windshear System (WR/PWS) is composed of: - 1 control unit, - 1 transceiver (WR/PWS), - 1 antenna, - 1 wave guide. Note: The PWS function is optional. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONTROL UNIT The Control Unit provides modes of operation, antenna tilt and gain of the receiver digitized information, via an ARINC 429 bus. An ON/OFF discrete ensures the energization of the transceiver which in turn supplies the control unit and the antenna. Two other discrete signals enable: - the windshear function (through AUTO/OFF switch) - BITE management, sent to the CFDIU. TRANSCEIVER The Weather Radar uses the principle of radio echoing to detect the level of precipitation, the ground map, and the principle of Doppler effect to detect the turbulence areas. The transmitter operates in X-Band frequency at 9345 MHz. The PWS function also uses the principle of Doppler effect to detect windshear events. Horizontal and vertical wind velocity, gravity and aircraft true airspeed are the different windshear components for the determination of the windshear threshold. ANTENNA The Weather Radar antenna is energized and controlled in azimuth and elevation by the transceiver. The radio frequency signals are exchanged between the transceiver and the antenna, via a wave guide. The antenna scans a 180 sector in azimuth and has a tilt coverage of + or - 15. An internal circuit of the transceiver ensures antenna stabilization. The stabilization data is: pitch and roll angles, selected tilt, antenna azimuth and elevation angle. T M U W P W C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 220 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION - GENERAL - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION T M U W P W C 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 221 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION SYSTEM INTERFACES ADIRUs The WR receives, from Air Data and Inertial Reference Units (ADIRUs) one and three, pitch and roll data, for the stabilization and control of the antenna, and ground speed for Doppler mode correction. The ADIRU, which provides data, is selected by means of the ATT/HDG selector switch. The PWS function receives data from ADIRU 1 and 3 for velocity calculations: - TAS, Altitude (or corrected altitude), EW and NS velocity GS, TRK angle, TRUE HDG and MAG HDG. LGCIU The Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU) sends Flight/Ground information to the transceiver. This discrete signal is used by the receiver BITE module to count the flight legs. In windshear condition, a landing gear extended signal is used in order to determine the transition from the landing mode to the take-off mode. CFDIU The Multipurpose Control and Display Units (MCDUs) allow the system to be tested via the Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU). The test is only available on ground. During the test, the antenna carries out an elevation and an azimuth scanning sequence. QUALIFIERS A AND B SIGNALS Two types of qualifier inputs are required to prevent automatic activation of the windshear function. - Qualifier A: 2 qualifiers are used (QA1 and QA2). Provided by the ATC/TCAS control unit, which indicates the position of the AUTO/ON/STBY switch. Qualifier A is valid when AUTO or ON is selected. - Qualifier B: 2 qualifiers are used (QB1 and QB2). Provided by EIU 1 and 2, which indicates a normal engine oil pressure. Qualifier B is valid when the engine is running (high oil pressure). The Windshear function is automatically activated below 2300ft RA and at least one of the two qualifier inputs, of both qualifiers A and B, has to be valid. RA The Radio Altimeter provides altitude information through an ARINC 429 bus. This data is used for automatic activation of the windshear function. AUDIO INHIBIT SIGNALS These discretes are used to indicate whether the aural alert output has to be active or not. - predictive windshear aural alerts (discrete input) inhibited by stall warning, - predictive windshear discrete output is used to inhibit aural alerts generated by TCAS or GPWS or other FWC warnings. AUDIO MIXING BOX An analog audio output allows the transmission of the aural alert windshear to an audio mixing box connected to loudspeakers. T M U W P W C 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 222 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W C 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION - SYSTEM INTERFACES EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 223 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION SYSTEM INTERFACES (Contd) EGPWS The Enhanced GPWS receives Predictive Windshear alerts from the radar hazard bus to determine the priorities. Alert Priorities: - WR/PWS warning, - WR/PWS caution, - GPWS Terrain warning, - GPWS Terrain caution. INDICATING The Weather Radar transceiver is connected to the DMCs by means of two ARINC 453 buses. Each data cable is terminated at one end by a low inductance resistor (68 ohms) to avoid a signal return. The Weather Radar image is shown on the CAPT and F/O NDs when ROSE or ARC mode is selected on the EFIS control panel. The Windshear events are shown on the CAPT and F/O NDs and all visual alerts on the CAPT and F/O PFDs. NOTE: When both EFIS control panels are in PLAN mode, the WR/PWS transceiver is de-energized. T M U W P W C 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 224 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W C 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 WR/PWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION - INDICATING EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 225 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION Which component controls antenna stabilization? A - ADIRU. B - Transceiver. C - Antenna. Which data is used for antenna stabilization? A - Pitch and roll. B - Selected tilt angle, antenna azimuth angle and elevation angle. C - A and B. When is the Windshear function automatically activated? A - Below 2300ft and one of the two qualifier inputs, of both qualifiers A and B, is valid. B - Always when a windshear event is encountered. C - When the AUTO/ON/STBY selector on the ATC/TCAS Control Unit is in STBY position. The Predictive Windshear discrete output is used to: A - Inhibit the windshear function. B - Inhibit aural alerts generated by TCAS or GPWS or other FWC warnings. C - Transmit the aural alert to the Audio Mixing Box. T M U W P W C 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 226 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-41-00 WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS CONTENTS: Control Panel Control Panel With Split Function (Option) WR Failure Messages PWS Indications (Option) PWS Alert Levels (Option) Self Examination T M U W P W E 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 227 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS CONTROL PANEL OFF/SYS/ON SYSTEM SWITCH When the system switch is set to ON, the Weather Radar system is energized and operates if at least one ND is set to ROSE or ARC mode. NOTE: The operative radar transceiver is de-energized when both EFIS selectors are in PLAN mode. GAIN KNOB The GAIN Knob permits receiver sensitivity adjustment in the different modes. In AUTO position, the optimum setting is automatically adjusted. Clockwise rotation of the GAIN knob (manual gain setting) adjusts the sensitivity to the MAX position. When not in AUTO mode, MAN is displayed in green in the right lower corner on the NDs except in case of failure or system TEST. MODE SELECTOR 1 - WX Position When the mode selector is in the WX position, the radar is in normal mode of operation and the colors on the NDs depend on the intensity of the precipitation. Precipitation rate and related color echoes (P: precipitation rate): - P < 1 mm/h: Black. - 1 < P < 4 mm/h: Green. - 4 < P < 12 mm/h: Yellow. - P > 12 mm/h: Red. 2 - WX/TURB position This mode corresponds to operation in weather and turbulence detection. The turbulence detection is limited to the first 40 NM from the A/C, beyond, the turbulence is displayed in the conventional colors as in WX mode. The turbulence areas are displayed in magenta on the NDs (P > 5 mm/s). 3 - MAP position The MAP mode is useful for back-up navigation, to display mountains, cities, coast lines or land/water boundaries. The colors on the NDs depend on the ground map: - Mountains and cities: Amber. - Ground: Green. - Calm water: Black. NOTE: A manual gain control is recommended when in MAP mode. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 228 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - CONTROL PANEL EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 229 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS CONTROL PANEL (CONTD) TILT KNOB The TILT knob allows manual control of the antenna elevation. The antenna elevation angle can be adjusted in 1/4 degree steps within a range of - 15 up to + 15. NOTE: TILT information is displayed in cyan in the right lower corner of the NDs except in case of failure or system TEST. NOTE: During a windshear detection event, the TILT antenna is automatically controlled. However, the TILT displayed on the NDs corresponds to the control panel setting. WINDSHEAR SWITCH (OPTION) The WINDSHEAR AUTO/OFF switch enables the activation/deactivation of the predictive windshear function. When in AUTO position the predictive windshear detection is automatically activated below 2500ft whatever the OFF/SYS/ON system switch position. The predictive windshear function detection can operate either with weather radar modes activated or independently. A dedicated windshear icon is superimposed on the radar image, displayed on the NDs, when the phenomena is detected. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 230 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - CONTROL PANEL EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 231 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS CONTROL PANEL WITH SPLIT FUNCTION (OPTION) 1/OFF/2 SYSTEM SWITCH This three stable position switch enables the activation of the transceiver 1 or 2 (if installed). When the switch is set to 1 or 2, the selected weather radar system is energized and operates if at least one ND is set to ROSE or ARC mode. MODE SELECTORS Two mode selector switches are available. The left one is dedicated to the CAPT and the right one to the F/O. 1 - WX Position: When the mode selector is in the WX position, the radar is in normal mode of operation and the colors on the NDs depend on the intensity of the precipitation. Precipitation rate and related color echoes (P: precipitation rate): - P < 1 mm/h: Black. - 1 < P < 4 mm/h: Green. - 4 < P < 12 mm/h: Yellow. - P > 12 mm/h: Red. 2 - WX/TURB position: This mode corresponds to operation in weather and turbulence detection. The turbulence detection is limited to the first 40 NM from the A/C, beyond, the turbulence is displayed in the conventional colors as in WX mode. The turbulence areas are displayed in magenta on the NDs (P > 5 mm/s). TILT KNOBS Two TILT knobs are available. The left one is dedicated to the CAPT and the right one to the F/O. The TILT knobs allow manual control of the antenna elevation. The antenna elevation angle can be adjusted in 1/4 degree steps within a range of - 15 up to + 15. NOTE: TILT information is displayed in cyan in the right lower corner of the NDs except in case of failure or system TEST. NOTE: During a windshear detection event, the TILT antenna is automatically controlled. However, the TILTs displayed on the NDs correspond to the control panel settings. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 232 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - CONTROL PANEL WITH SPLIT FUNCTION EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 233 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS CONTROL PANEL WITH SPLIT FUNCTION (OPTION) (CONTD) CAPT/BOTH/FO SWITCH (OPTION) 1 - BOTH POSITION: The CAPT and the F/O can operate separately the control panels using their associated controls. Thus, two different weather radar images, with different settings, can be displayed on the CAPT and F/O NDs. Each scan of the weather radar alternately refreshes the CAPT and the F/O displays. 2 - CAPT Position: The weather radar image with the CAPT setting is displayed on both NDs. 3 - F/O Position: The weather radar image with the F/O setting is displayed on both NDs. NOTE: Below 2500ft the switch must be set to CAPT or F/O position in order to keep an appropriate refresh rate of the radar image in case of windshear event detection. WINDSHEAR SWITCH (OPTION) The WINDSHEAR AUTO/OFF switch enables the activation/deactivation of the predictive windshear function. When in AUTO position the predictive windshear detection is automatically activated below 2500 ft whatever the 1/OFF/2 system switch position. The predictive windshear function detection can operate either with weather radar modes activated or independently. A dedicated windshear icon is superimposed on the radar image, displayed on the NDs, when the phenomena is detected. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 4
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 234 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 4
L E V E L
2 WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - CONTROL PANEL WITH SPLIT FUNCTION EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 235 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS WR FAILURE MESSAGES Two types of failures are likely to affect the radar system: - Failures which result in a loss of radar image, displayed in red (loss of a radar system component). - Failures which affect the radar image, displayed in amber (loss of a function). EXAMPLE: Transceiver failure red message: WXR T/R (Red) appears in the right lower corner of the ND. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 5
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 236 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - WR FAILURE MESSAGES T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 5
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 11 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 237 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS PWS INDICATIONS (OPTION) The windshear information is presented on the NDs only in the 10NM range. If not in this range and a windshear alert is generated, the message: - W/S: SET RNG 10 NM is shown on the NDs. When a windshear fault occurs, the radar image remains available if the fault does not affect the radar modes or detection function. When a fault is detected amber PRED W/S message appears on the NDs if: - A/C on ground or flap/slat lever not in 0 position. - WINDSHEAR AUTO/OFF switch on W/R control panel in AUTO position. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 6
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 12 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 238 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - PWS INDICATIONS T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 6
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 13 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 239 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS PWS ALERT LEVELS (OPTION) There are three alert levels defined in function of event seriousness and distance from the aircraft. Visual and aural warnings are provided in function of the level detected. - LEVEL 3: between 50ft and 1200ft (Warning Alert) * Aural warning message: GO AROUND WINDSHEAR AHEAD (Approach), WINDSHEAR AHEAD WINDSHEAR AHEAD (Take-Off) * Visual warning: red W/S AHEAD message on PFD. - LEVEL 2: between 50ft and 1200ft (Caution Alert) * Aural warning message: MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY * Visual warning: amber W/S AHEAD message on PFD. - LEVEL 1: No windshear advisory above 1500ft. No aural or visual warnings only the windshear icon superimposed on the radar image. T M U W P W E 0 2 - T 0 7
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 14 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 240 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - PWS ALERT LEVELS T M U W P W E 0 2 - P 0 7
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 15 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 241 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION In which mode is the manual gain adjustment recommended? A - In any mode. B - In MAP mode. C - In WX/TURB mode. Can a radar image be displayed in PLAN mode? A - Yes. B - No. Does an amber warning mean the loss of radar image? A - Yes. B - No. When the radar system switch is in OFF position? A - The predictive windshear function is not activated. B - The predictive windshear function is active until the WINDSHEAR/AUTO/OFF is in the AUTO position. B - The predictive windshear function is always available. T M U W P W E 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 16 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 242 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-41-00 WR/PWS OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS CONTENTS: Special Precautions T M U W P W G 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 1 Sep 30/97 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 243 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS TRAINING INFORMATION POINT SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS Some special precautions must be taken before using the weather radar system on the ground in MAP, WX or WINDSHEAR mode. - The dangerous zone forward of the aircraft must be free of metallic obstacles such as hangars or aircraft, within 5 meters in an arc of + or - 90 on either side of the aircraft centerline. - Make sure that nobody is within a distance of 1.5 meters from the antenna, in an arc of + or - 135 on either side of the aircraft centerline. - The system must not be operated during the refueling of the aircraft or during any refueling operation within 100 meters. NOTE: Although the power radiated by the system is low, the above written safety precautions should be observed for obvious routine reasons (behaviour with respect to other types of radar systems). To avoid radiating danger, and nuisance aural alerts the WINDSHEAR AUTO/OFF selector switch must be selected OFF independently of the radar selector switch. T M U W P W G 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 2 Sep 30/97 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 244 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS - SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS T M U W P W G 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 3 Sep 30/97 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 245 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. T M U W P W G 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 4 Sep 30/97 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 246 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-41-00 WR/PWS COMPONENTS CONTENTS: WR/PWS Transceiver WR/PWS Mounting Tray WR/PWS Antenna WR/PWS Control Unit T M U W P W J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 247 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS COMPONENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Move the radar antenna assembly carefully to prevent injury to persons and damage to equipment (approximate weight: 15kg (33lb)). Note: The PWS function is optional. WR/PWS TRANSCEIVER IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1SQ1 LOCATION ZONE: 121 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the transceiver is fitted with a TEST pushbutton and a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the front of the transceiver. The back is equipped with an ARINC 600 size connector including the wave guide insert. When the TEST pushbutton is pressed, a test sequence is started, RADAR OK and INPUT OK appear at the end when no faults have been detected. WR/PWS MOUNTING TRAY IDENTIFICATION FIN: 9SQ LOCATION ZONE: 121 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The WR transceiver is cooled by the avionics ventilation system. The wave guide switch ensures switching of the RF signal from the antenna to the transceiver in the case of dual weather radar installation. T M U W P W J 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 248 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U W P W J 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 WR/PWS COMPONENTS - TRANSCEIVER AND MOUNTING TRAY EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 249 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS COMPONENTS WR/PWS ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION FIN: 7SQ (Antenna Drive) FIN: 11SQ (Antenna Plate) LOCATION ZONE: 110 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The antenna movements are ensured by 2DC motors and the angular positions are copied by synchros. Two switches for Azimuth (AZ) and Elevation (EL) are installed on the antenna drive. They are normally mechanically locked in the ON position. When in OFF position, the command of the corresponding motor is cancelled. NOTE: A position indicator for the elevation axis (+ or -45) is used to check the antenna drive calibration with AZ switch in OFF position. T M U W P W J 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 250 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS COMPONENTS - ANTENNA T M U W P W J 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 251 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS COMPONENTS WR/PWS CONTROL UNIT IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SQ LOCATION ZONE: 210 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The gain and tilt data are digitized by an 8 bit analog to digital converter. Moreover, the different positions of the mode selector switch and the data, from the potentiometer, are formatted to ARINC 429 words. T M U W P W J 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 252 EFFECTIVITY ALL WR/PWS COMPONENTS - CONTROL UNIT T M U W P W J 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 253 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U W P W J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-41-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 254 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-42-00 RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Principle Components Indicating T M U R A D G 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 1 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 255 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION PRINCIPLE The Radio Altimeter (RA) System determines the height of the aircraft above the terrain during initial climb, approach and landing phases. The RA can therefore operate over non-flat ground surface. The principle of the radio altimeter is to transmit a frequency modulated signal, from the aircraft to the ground, and to receive the ground reflected signal after a certain delay. The time between the transmission and the reception of the RA signal is proportional to the A/C height. T M U R A D G 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 2 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 256 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE T M U R A D G 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 3 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 257 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The components are two transceivers, two fans, two transmission antennae and two reception antennae. The RA system is also connected to the DMCs for display on the Primary Flight Displays (PFDs). T M U R A D G 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 4 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 258 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U R A D G 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 5 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 259 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION INDICATING The aircraft height data is displayed on the Primary Flight Displays for heights less than or equal to 2500 ft. The altitude is also shown by means of: - A ground line rising on to the pitch down area (Below 300 ft). - A red ribbon next to the altitude scale (Below 500 ft). T M U R A D G 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 6 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 260 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER SYSTEM PRESENTATION - INDICATING T M U R A D G 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 7 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 261 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U R A D G 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 8 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 262 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-42-00 RADIO ALTIMETER DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General Transceiver Antennae Fan Indicating Users EIU LGCIU CFDIU Self Examination T M U R A D A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 263 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Radio Altimeter (RA) system consists of two independent systems comprising : - Two transceivers with associated mounts and fans, - Two transmission antennae, - Two reception antennae. TRANSCEIVER The RA transceiver measures the radio height of the aircraft in relation to the ground. The transceiver operates in a frequency range of 4200 to 4400 Mhz. ANTENNAE The RA system includes two identical transmission and reception antennae. The operating range of the antenna according to the aircraft attitude is limited to + or - 30 degree for pitch and roll. FAN Each RA transceiver is cooled by an associated fan, attached under the transceiver mount. A capacitor is mounted on the fan case in order to suppress the parasites. INDICATING In normal operation, RA 1 provides the radio height to the Captain Primary Flight Display (PFD) and RA 2 to the First Officer PFD through the Display Management Computers (DMCs). In case of one transceiver failure the DMC automatically switches to the other one. The radio height information appears on the PFDs when less than or equal to 2500 ft. USERS The RA information is sent to various systems through ARINC 429 buses. - EGPWS for terrain warnings, - FMGCs for processing data, - FWCs for call out indications and warnings, - ELACs for integration into various flight parameters. T M U R A D A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 264 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER DESCRIPTION/OPERATION T M U R A D A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 265 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER DESCRIPTION/OPERATION EIU The Engine Interface Unit (EIU) 1(2) sends a ground discrete to the RA 1(2) to inhibit the test on ground when the associated engine is operating. N2 rating > minimum idle rating. LGCIU The Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU) provides the flight/ground information which is used by the receiver BITE module to count the flight legs. CFDIU The Multipurpose Control and Display Units (MCDUs) allow the systems to be tested via the Centralized Fault Display and Interface Unit (CFDIU). The tests are only available on ground. T M U R A D A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 266 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U R A D A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 267 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION In normal operation, how is the height data provided ? A - By system 1 to Capt PFD and F/O PFD B - By system 2 to CAPT PFD and F/O PFD C - By system 1 to CAPT PFD and by system 2 to F/O PFD What happens if Radio Altimeter 1 fails ? A - RA 2 provides data to the EGPWC. B - FMGC 1 provides data to the EGPWC. C - The EGPWC no longer receives Radio Altitude. T M U R A D A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 268 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-42-00 RA INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AUTOMATIC CALL OUT CONTENTS: Decision Height (DH) Radio Height Analog Indication Rising Runway Indicating Failure Automatic Call Out Self Examination T M U R A D B 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 269 EFFECTIVITY ALL RA INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AUTOMATIC CALL OUT DECISION HEIGHT (DH) After the selection made by the pilot on the Multipurpose Control Display Unit (MCDU), the Decision Height (DH) data is displayed in the fourth column of the Flight Mode Annunciator as soon as Radio Altimeters operate. When the radio height reaches the Decision Height (DH), an amber DH message flashes then remains steady. RADIO HEIGHT The radio height is displayed at the bottom of the attitude sphere for heights less than 2500 feet. The indication accuracy is in function of the height. - H > 50 ft: 10 ft increments, - 5 ft < H <= 50 ft: 5 ft increments, - H <= 5 ft: 1 ft increments. ANALOG INDICATION A red ribbon is displayed on the right of the altitude scale representing the field elevation. This red ribbon is displayed below 570 ft. On ground the top of the ribbon is on the middle of the altitude window. T M U R A D B 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 270 EFFECTIVITY ALL RA INDICATIONS ON PFD: DH AND RADIO HEIGHT T M U R A D B 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 271 EFFECTIVITY ALL RA INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AUTOMATIC CALL OUT RISING RUNWAY INDICATING In the final phase of an approach, below 150 feet, the white lower limit of the attitude sphere moves up as the aircraft approaches the ground. This lower limit line covers the graduations of the pitch scale when it moves up. FAILURE When the slat/flap lever is not at zero, if both Radio Altimeters fail, a red RA flag is shown in place of the radio height information. Independently of slat/flap position, with failure of both RA, the red ribbon indication goes out of view and the white lower limit line remains in its position. AUTOMATIC CALL OUT Below 400 feet, the radio altitude is announced by a synthetic voice,generated by the Flight Warning Computer (FWC). The altitude call out corresponds to predetermined thresholds selected by pin programming listed hereafter: - 400: four hundred - 300: Three hundred - 200: two hundred - 100: one hundred - 50: fifty - 40: forty - 30: thirty - 20: twenty - 10: ten - 5: five - DH + 100: hundred above - DH: minimum T M U R A D B 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 272 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U R A D B 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 RA INDICATIONS ON PFD: RISING RUNWAY INDICATING AND FAILURE EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 273 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION With DH of 100ft entered on the MCDU, when will the radio altitude indication become amber? A - At 100 ft. B - At 200 ft. C - At 400 ft. When does the red RA flag appear on the PFD? A - When one RA fails. A - When both RAs fail and the slats are extended. A - When both RAs fail below 2500ft. T M U R A D B 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 274 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-42-00 RADIO ALTIMETER COMPONENTS CONTENTS: RA Transceivers RA Fans RA Antennae T M U R A D D 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 275 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER COMPONENTS RA TRANSCEIVERS IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2SA1, 2SA2 LOCATION ZONE: 152 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the transceiver is fitted with a TEST p/b, a TEST connector and four LEDS. When the TEST p/b is pressed in, the four LEDs come on. If the test is OK, the four LEDs go off when the TEST p/b is released out. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 electrical connector. T M U R A D D 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 276 EFFECTIVITY ALL RA COMPONENTS - TRANSCEIVERS T M U R A D D 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 277 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER COMPONENTS RA FANS IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SA1, 3SA2 LOCATION ZONE: 152 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The six-blade fan is integral with a removal base plate attached under the transceiver mount. It is contained in a square aluminium alloy case. It is supplied with 115VAC through the electrical circuit of the associated transceiver. Parasites are suppressed by a capacitor mounted on the fan. T M U R A D D 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 278 EFFECTIVITY ALL RA COMPONENTS - FANS T M U R A D D 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 279 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER COMPONENTS RA ANTENNAE IDENTIFICATION FIN: - Reception : 5SA1, 5SA2 - Transmission : 6SA1, 6SA2 LOCATION ZONE: 153 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The transmission and the reception antennae are identical. The small thickeners antenna is installed on the aircrafts skin. Each antenna is supplied through a coaxial connector linked to the transceiver. T M U R A D D 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 280 EFFECTIVITY ALL RA COMPONENTS - ANTENNAE T M U R A D D 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 281 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. T M U R A D D 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 282 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-43-00 TCAS PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Principle Components Indicating Self Examination T M U T C A B 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 1 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 283 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS PRESENTATION PRINCIPLE The Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) is a system whose function is to detect and display aircraft in the immediate vicinity and to provide the flight crew with indications to avoid these intruders. The TCAS indications for flight plan modifications are in the vertical plane only. The TCAS detects the air traffic control system or TCAS equipped aircraft and maintains surveillance within a range determined by its sensivity. To evaluate threat potential of other aircraft the system divides the space around aircraft into 4 volumes. - OTHER TRAFFIC VOLUME. The OTHER TRAFFIC VOLUME is the first volume providing the presence and the progress of on intruder. (No collision threat). - PROXIMATE TRAFFIC VOLUME. The proximate traffic volume is defined by a given volume around the TCAS equipped aircraft. (No collision threat, but in vicinity). - TRAFFIC ADVISORY VOLUME (TA). When the intruder is relatively near but does not represent an immediate threat, the TCAS provides an aural and visual information known as Traffic Advisory (TA). The TCAS aural messages can be inhibited depending on higher priority aural messages. - RESOLUTION ADVISORY VOLUME (RA). When the intruder represents a collision threat, the TCAS triggers an aural and visual alarm known as Resolution Advisory (RA), which informs the crew about avoidance maneuvers. T M U T C A B 0 5 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 2 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 284 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE T M U T C A B 0 5 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 3 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 285 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The TCAS components are two antennae, one TCAS computer and one TCAS/ATC control panel. Note: The TCAS/ATC control panels shown here after are given as examples. They may differ according to the aircraft configuration. T M U T C A B 0 5 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 4 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 286 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U T C A B 0 5 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 5 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 287 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS PRESENTATION INDICATING The TCAS indications appear on the PFD and the ND. The visual resolution and traffic advisory indications are associated with aural indications such as "TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC", "CLIMB, CLIMB"... The TCAS displays only the most threatening intruders. T M U T C A B 0 5 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 6 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 288 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS PRESENTATION - INDICATING T M U T C A B 0 5 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 7 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 289 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION Which aircraft are detected by the TCAS ? A - All. B - Only ATC Mode S equipped A/C. C - ATC equipped A/C. T M U T C A B 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 8 Mar 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 290 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-43-00 TCAS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General Antennae Control Panel Computer ATC Radio Altimeter ADIRU CFDIU LGCIU Indicating Inhibition Pin Programming DATA Loader Self Exination T M U T C A F 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 291 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) includes: - 1 control unit (common with ATC system), - 1 computer, - 2 antennae (1 top and 1 bottom). ANTENNAE The TCAS directional antennae provide azimuth information on aircraft located within the TCAS surveillance range. They transmit at 1030 MHz and receive at 1090 MHz. The phase and amplitude of the received signal depend on the direction of the signal source which permits the relative bearing of the transmitting aircraft to be determined. CONTROL PANEL The operating modes of the TCAS are selected on a common TCAS/ATC control panel. The TCAS information is transmitted to the TCAS computer via the ATC transponder. COMPUTER The TCAS computer ensures two main functions: - a transmission/reception function for intruder acquisition, - a processing function for operation control. (Digital, discrete and analog types interfaces, intruder trajectory computation and tracking, visual and aural alert commands). ATC The operative ATC Mode S transponder transmits response to ATC ground station interrogations and data to the TCAS. (Baro altitude, TCAS mode from control panel, TCAS broadcast messages). The Mode S transponder permits communication between the TCAS and a TCAS equipped and detected aircraft through the communication link function for exchanging coordination messages. RADIO ALTIMETER The Radio Altimeter (RA) provide radio height used as reference to determine the computation sensitivity level and triggers the inhibit orders. The radio height is used in the 0 to 2500Ft range. ADIRU The IR part ADIRU provides the magnetic heading and the pitch and roll attitude information to the TCAS computer. NOTE: The Baro altitude is transmitted via the ATC transponder. T M U T C A F 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 292 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION T M U T C A F 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 293 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CFDIU The Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU) allows testing and trouble-shooting of the TCAS through the MCDU. The tests are only available on ground. LGCIU The Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU) provides a flight ground signal used by the BITE module for flight leg counting. It provides also a landing gear extended signal for TCAS operation. INDICATING Visual indications are presented on the NDs and PFDs. The NDs present the location of intruders in the traffic area. The PFDs present the avoidance maneuver indications on the vertical speed scale. The FWCs monitor the validity of the information. Synthesized voice announcements generated by the TCAS computer and broadcast by the loudspeakers accompany the visual indications. INHIBITION Various discrete signals are used for inhibition by equipment with higher priority than the TCAS. These priorities are: - windshear - stall - EGPWS messages Consequently Traffic Advisory (TA) mode is selected and the voice announcements are cancelled (Master Warning P/B switch). PIN PROGRAMMING Some pin programs define the operating mode of the TCAS. Operating mode: - audio level output, - all traffic/threat traffic display, - ground display mode (TA mode), - number of intruders displayed, (8 maximum), - aircraft altitude limit (48000Ft). DATA LOADER It will be possible to load software data into the TCAS computer by means of a DATA loader. The remote loading capability is linked by 2 ARINC 429 low speed buses to a dedicated connector in the aircraft. T M U T C A F 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 294 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U T C A F 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 295 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION The TCAS/ATC control panel controls: A - ATC transponders and TCAS computer directly. B - ATC transponders directly and TCAS computer through the ATC transponders. C - TCAS computer directly and ATC transponders through the TCAS computer. The TCAS receives heading, pitch and roll data from: A - ADIRU 1. B - ADIRU 1 or 3 according to AIR DATA switch status. C - Selected ATC transponder. T M U T C A F 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 296 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-43-00 TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O CONTENTS: COLLINS Control Panel SEXTANT ControL Panel GABLES Control Panel Self Examination T M U T C A H 0 5
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 1 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 297 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O COLLINS CONTROL PANEL GENERAL The purpose of this module is to understand the use of the various controls of the TCAS part of the TCAS/ATC control panel. MODE SELECTOR The TCAS mode of operation is selected by means of a rotary mode selector. - STBY and XPDR position: The advisory generation and surveillance functions are inhibited. - TA position: This mode provides only traffic advisories, it doesnt generate any resolution advisories. - TA/RA position: This is the normal operating mode, it provides the preventive and the corrective advisories in order to avoid conflicts with other aircraft. -TFC position: This mode provides all traffic indications of all aircraft in the other, proximate, TA and RA volumes (8 maximum). ABOVE/N/BELOW SWITCHES The TCAS surveillance envelope is expanded above or below the TCAS equipped aircraft whatever the mode selected (TA-TA/RA-TFC). -ABOVE position: From -2700 ft to +9900 ft. -N (normal position): From -2700 ft to +2700 ft. -BELOW position: From +2700 ft to -9900 ft. INOP SWITCHES The functions under INOP placards are reserved for a future use. T M U T C A H 0 5 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 2 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 298 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O - COLLINS T M U T C A H 0 5 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 3 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 299 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O SEXTANT CONTROL PANEL STBY/TA/TA/RA MODE SELECTOR The TCAS mode of operation is selected by means of a rotary mode selector. - STBY position: The advisory generation and surveillance functions are inhibited. - TA position: This mode provides only traffic advisories, it doesnt generate any resolution advisories. - TA/RA position: This is the normal operating mode, it provides the preventive and the corrective advisories in order to avoid conflicts with other aircraft. THRT/ALL/ABV/BLW MODE SELECTOR Two other types of targets for TCAS traffic can be selected by means of a rotary mode selector. - THRT position: The THRT function (THREAT TRAFFIC), defined as PROXIMATE traffic, is conditioned by the presence of a TA or RA intruder. - ALL position: The ALL function, defined as OTHER traffic, provides all intruders that do not enter in the proximate, TA and RA categories. The TCAS surveillance envelope is expanded above or below the TCAS equipped aircraft for Traffic Advisory. -ABV position: From -2700 ft to +9900 ft. -BLW position: From +2700 ft to -9900 ft. In normal operation (non selection of ABV or BLW), the vertical surveillance taken into account is between +/- 2700ft. T M U T C A H 0 5 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 4 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 300 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O - SEXTANT T M U T C A H 0 5 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 5 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 301 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O GABLES CONTROL PANEL TCAS MODE SELECTOR The TCAS mode of operation is selected by means of a rotary mode selector. -OFF position: TCAS advisory generation and surveillance functions are inhibited - TA position: The TCAS computer is fully operational but provides only traffic advisories, it doesnt generate any resolution advisories. TA intruders are displayed on the NDs. - TA/RA position: This is the normal operating mode, it provides the preventive and the corrective advisories in order to avoid conflicts with other aircraft. T M U T C A H 0 5 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 6 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 302 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS CONTROL PANEL D/O - GABLES T M U T C A H 0 5 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 7 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 303 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION With mode selector in TA position: A - Only traffic advisories are provided. B - All traffic indications are provided. C - No TCAS information is provided. T M U T C A H 0 5
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 8 Apr 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 304 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-43-00 TCAS INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AURAL ALERTS CONTENTS: General Preventive Resolution Advisory Corrective Resolution Advisory Aural Alerts V/S Failure TCAS Failure Self Examination T M U T C A J 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 305 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AURAL ALERTS GENERAL The PFD presents indications on the Vertical Speed (V/S) scale, only in case of Resolution Advisories (RA) detection. The indications, given in the form of red or green partially colored sectors, advise the crew of the action necessary to resolve the conflict. PREVENTIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORY A preventive resolution advisory informs the crew to avoid certain deviations from current vertical speed. It can be represented by one or two red sectors on the V/S scale. CORRECTIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORY A corrective resolution advisory informs the crew to perform a vertical avoidance maneuver. The grey background of the V/S scale is totally replaced by red/green sectors. The V/S indications (Digital value and needle) are in the colour of the corresponding sector. AURAL ALERTS Trajectory correction or holding visual orders are accompanied by synthesized voice announcements generated by the TCAS computer, whose level can be adjusted by the crew. - PREVENTIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORY "TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC" (Only in case of TA detection) "MONITOR VERTICAL SPEED, MONITOR VERTICAL SPEED" - CORRECTIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORY "CLIMB, CLIMB, CLIMB" "CLIMB, CROSSING CLIMB, CLIMB, CROSSING CLIMB" "REDUCE CLIMB, REDUCE CLIMB" "INCREASE CLIMB, INCREASE CLIMB" "CLIMB, CLIMB NOW, CLIMB, CLIMB NOW" "DESCEND, DESCEND, DESCEND" "DESCEND, CROSSING DESCENT, DESCEND, CROSSING DESCENT" "REDUCE DESCENT, REDUCE DESCENT" "INCREASE DESCENT, INCREASE DESCENT" "DESCEND, DESCEND NOW, DESCEND, DESCEND NOW" - AIRCRAFT SEPARATION HAS BEEN ACHIEVED: "CLEAR OF CONFLICT" T M U T C A J 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 306 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AURAL ALERTS - PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE ADVISORIES T M U T C A J 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 307 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AURAL ALERTS V/S FAILURE In case of vertical speed indication failure, a red V/S flag appears. TCAS information, if any, are presented without V/S indications. TCAS FAILURE In case of TCAS failure, a red TCAS flag is displayed when the system cannot deliver Resolution Advisories (RA) data. T M U T C A J 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 308 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON PFD AND AURAL ALERTS - FAILURES T M U T C A J 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 309 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION The PFD presents TCAS indications: A - On the V/S scale in case of TA and RA detection. B - On the SPEED scale as Preventive Advisoriy. C - On the V/S scale only in case of RA detection. The colour of the V/S indications change to: A - red when in presence of a corrective RA detection B - green when a in presence of corrective RA detection C - red or green when in presence of a corrective RA detection depending on the sector band in which they are. T M U T C A J 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 310 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-43-00 TCAS INDICATIONS ON ND CONTENTS Display Conditions Intruder No Bearing Intruder Messages Self Examination T M U T C A L 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 311 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON ND DISPLAY CONDITIONS The ND presents traffic indication using different symbols corresponding to the type of intruders These indications are displayed only in ROSE and ARC modes, and ONLY in the 10, 20 and 40 NM range. NOTE: If the PLAN mode is selected, a message informs the crew to change mode. INTRUDER The intruders are displayed with range, bearing, reative altitude and vertical speed tendancy depending on the setting of the mode selector on the TCAS/ATC control panel. Only the eight most threatening intruders are displayed. T M U T C A L 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 312 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON ND - INTRUDER TYPE T M U T C A L 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 313 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON ND NO BEARING INTRUDER The TCAS can detect an intruder not equipped with TCAS without acquiring its bearing. Its characteristics are displayed on the lower part of the ND. Only the two most threatening intruders are displayed, the most dangerous is displayed on the left side. MESSAGES Different type of messages can be displayed: - Mode and Range messages, - TCAS operations and failure messages. T M U T C A L 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 314 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS INDICATIONS ON ND - NO BEARING INTRUDER AND TCAS MESSAGES T M U T C A L 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 315 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION A RA is represented on the ND with: A - a red square B - A red circle C - a white filled diamond shape. T M U T C A L 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 316 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-43-00 TCAS COMPONENTS CONTENTS: TCAS Computer (Collins) TCAS Computer (Honeywell) TCAS Computer (Bendix) TCAS Antennae TCAS Control Panel (Collins) TCAS Control Panel (Sextant) TCAS Control Panel (Gables) T M U T C A N 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 317 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS COMPUTER (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1SG LOCATION ZONE: 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the computer is fitted with 9 LEDs and a TEST pushbutton. When the TEST pushbutton is pressed in, the 9 LEDs come on. If the test is OK, the LEDs should go off when the TEST pushbutton is released out. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 electrical connector. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 318 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 TCAS COMPONENTS - COMPUTER (COLLINS) EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 319 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS COMPUTER (HONEYWELL) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1SG LOCATION ZONE: 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the computer is fitted with 11 LEDs and a TEST pushbutton. When the TEST pushbutton is pressed in, the 11 LEDs come on (lAMP Test first then SELF-TEST). If the test is OK, the LEDs should go off. The TEST can be repeated until a maximun of 10 flight legs have been displayed. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 electrical connector. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 320 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 TCAS COMPONENTS - COMPUTER (HONEYWELL) EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 321 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS COMPUTER (BENDIX) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1SG LOCATION ZONE: 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the computer is fitted with a data loading connector which enables data to be loaded from a portable data loader. The front face is also fitted with a test connector. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 electrical connector. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 322 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 TCAS COMPONENTS - COMPUTERS (BENDIX) EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 323 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS ANTENNAE IDENTIFICATION FIN: 7SG1, 7SG2 LOCATION ZONE: 230, 130 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The TCAS directional antennae are composed of four passive and independent vertically-polarized elements. A teflon gasket is located between the fuselage and the base of the antenna in order to facilitate the removal of the antenna. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 324 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS - ANTENNAE T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 325 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS CONTROL PANEL (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SH LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The processor of the TCAS/ATC control panel controls the ATC and TCAS function via an ARINC 429 bus. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 326 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS - CONTROL PANEL (COLLINS) T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 11 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 327 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS CONTROL PANEL (SEXTANT) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SH LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The processor of the TCAS/ATC control panel controls the ATC and TCAS function via an ARINC 429 bus. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 12 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 328 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS - CONTROL PANEL (SEXTANT) T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 13 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 329 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS TCAS CONTROL PANEL (BENDIX) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SH LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The processor of the TCAS/ATC control panel controls the ATC and TCAS function via an ARINC 429 bus. T M U T C A N 0 5 - T 0 7
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 14 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 330 EFFECTIVITY ALL TCAS COMPONENTS - CONTROL PANEL (BENDIX) T M U T C A N 0 5 - P 0 7
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 15 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 331 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. T M U T C A N 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-43-00 Page 16 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 332 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-48-00 ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General Principle Components Indicating T M U E G P A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 1 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 333 EFFECTIVITY ALL ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION GENERAL The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) is built over the current GPWS. - EGPWS = GPWS + "ENHANCED" functions. PRINCIPLE The purpose of the Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) is to help prevent accidents caused by Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT). When boundaries of any alerting envelope are exceeded; aural alert messages, visual annunciations and displays are generated. The basic GPWS modes generate aural and visual warnings corresponding to an aircraft behaviour when the alert envelope is penetrated. The "ENHANCED" features complete the basic GPWS modes: - Terrain Clearance Floor (TCF): Increase the terrain clearance envelope around the airport runway. - Terrain Awareness alerting and Display (TAD): Incorporation of a terrain database to predict conflict between flight path and terrain and to display the conflicting terrain. T M U E G P A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 2 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 334 EFFECTIVITY ALL ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE T M U E G P A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 3 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 335 EFFECTIVITY ALL ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The system comprises an EGPWC, a control panel, two warning lights and two TERRAIN ON ND mode pushbutton switches. The EGPWS is connected to various navigation systems (WR, RA, ADIRS, ILS...). It processes the navigation data and generates alarms. T M U E G P A 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 4 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 336 EFFECTIVITY ALL ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U E G P A 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 5 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 337 EFFECTIVITY ALL ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION INDICATING The basic GPWS modes generate visual warnings through associated lights and synthetic warnings through the loudspeakers. The "ENHANCED" GPWS functions allow the terrain hazards to be displayed on the Navigation Display (ND). T M U E G P A 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 6 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 338 EFFECTIVITY ALL ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM PRESENTATION - INDICATING T M U E G P A 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 7 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 339 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U E G P A 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 8 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 340 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-48-00 EGPWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Enhanced Function EGPWS Controls Aural Warnings Visual Warnings FWC LGCIU Self Examination T M U E G P C 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 341 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) consists of: - 1 computer, - 2 GPWS / G/S pushbutton with integral lights, - 1 GPWS control panel, - 2 TERRAIN ON ND pushbuttons. DIGITAL INPUTS The EGPWS receives ARINC 429 data inputs from the navigation sensors in order to monitor the aircraft position with respect to the terrain and provide audio and visual warnings when in hazardous situation. DIGITAL OUTPUTS An ARINC 429 transmitter provides a maintenance output data bus. This output bus is used by the CFDIU for maintenance purposes and by the Aircraft Integrated Data System (AIDS) for the Data Management Unit (DMU). ENHANCED FUNCTION The EGPWC outputs a display of terrain data in ARINC 453 data bus format to the DMCs. The terrain data is displayed on the ND automatically in place of the radar image when a Terrain Caution or Warning is detected or any time by using the TERR ON ND pushbutton. The EGPWS receives the Predictive Windshear (PWS) alerts from the weather radar hazard bus to determine the priority. The PWS has priority over EGPWS modes. EGPWS CONTROLS Various pushbuttons allow the crew to control the actions of the EGPWS. When pressed in, on the GPWS control panel: - The TERR p/b (white legend) inhibits the terrain awareness. - The SYS p/b (white legend) inhibits all the GPWS warnings (mode 1 to 5). - The G/S MODE p/b (white legend) inhibits the glide/slope mode (mode 5). - The FLAP MODE p/b (white legend) inhibits flap abnormal condition input (mode 4) and generates the green "GPWS FLAP MODE OFF" message on the ECAM MEMO page (EWD). - The LDG FLAP 3 p/b (white legend) selects the landing FLAP 3 position and generates the green "GPWS FLAP 3" message on the ECAM MEMO page (EWD). When pressed in the GPWS / G/S p/b, on the instrument panels, has two functions: - The GPWS / G/S p/b sends a ground signal to trigger the self test sequence (available on ground or above 2000 ft Above Ground Level: AGL), - or cancels the glide/slope aural and visual warnings when triggered. When the TERRAIN ON ND p/b is pressed in, on the center instrument panel, the green ON legend comes on to indicate that terrain data is displayed on the ND. T M U E G P C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 342 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION T M U E G P C 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 343 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS DESCRIPTION/OPERATION AURAL WARNINGS The audio output is used to broadcast aural warning messages which identify the activated mode. The ECAM control panel sends an audio suppression signal, when the EMERG CANCEL p/b is pressed, to the EGPWC in order to momentarily cancel the EGPWS warnings. VISUAL WARNINGS In hazardous flight configurations or system failures the EGPWC provides discretes for the illumination of warning legends. Five discretes control the warning legends: - One for red GPWS legends, for ground proximity warning (mode 1 to 4) and for Terrain Caution and Warning Alert. - One for amber G/S legends, for Glide/Slope advisory alert (mode 5). - Two monitor outputs for the amber FAULT legends on the SYS and TERR p/b of the GPWS control panel. These discretes are also sent to the System Data Acquisition Concentrators (SDACs) to generate the ECAM "GPWS FAULT" and "GPWS TERR DET FAULT" warning messages. - One monitor output for the availability of the terrain mode.In case of FMS low accuracy a green TERR STBY is sent through the SDACs to the ECAM MEMO page (EWD). FWC The Flight Warning Computers (FWCs) send a discrete to the EGPWC to inhibit all warnings when a stall or windshear warning is triggered. The EGPWC sends two discretes to the FWCs and the TCAS in order to inhibit auto call out and low speed warnings and change TCAS mode from Resolution Advisory (RA) to Traffic Advisory (TA) when the GPWS or G/S warnings are in progress. These discretes are also used by the Digital Flight Data Recorder (DFDR). LGCIU The Landing Gear Control Interface Unit sends a flight/ground discrete signal to the EGPWC BITE mode to count the flight legs. This discrete is also used for Mode 4 (Unsafe Terrain Clearance). T M U E G P C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 344 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What happens to the EGPWS when the stall warning is triggered? A - All modes are inhibited. B - Mode 4 is inhibited. C - Mode 5 is inhibited. What happens when the G/S p/b is pressed in on the GPWS control panel? A - The Glide/Slope mode is inhibited. B - Only Glide/Slope mode is valid. C - The self test sequence is initiated. What happens when the TERR ON ND p/b is pressed in? A - The ND displays the terrain image. B - The terrain image is superposed with the radar image on the ND. C - The radar image is present until a terrain caution or warning is detected. The EGPWS has priority over: A - All systems. B - Auto call out, low speed warning and TCAS. C - Stall and windshear. T M U E G P C 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 345 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U E G P C 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 346 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-48-00 EGPWS MODES CONTENTS: General Warning Modes Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Terrain Awareness And Display (TAD)(JAA & FAA) Terrain Clearance Floor (TCF) Self Examination T M U E G P E 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 1 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 347 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES GENERAL The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) computes and compares the aircraft behaviour with a predermined envelope. WARNING MODES When the warning envelope is penetrated, visual and aural warnings are generated. The aural messages are broadcast through the cockpit loudspeakers and visual warnings are indicated by the GPWS / G/S pushbutton lights and the GPWS control panel. A terrain image is displayed on the ND. NOTE: A number of airports through the world have approaches or departures which are not entirely compatible with the standard GPWS operation. These airports are identified in the data base, the GPWS recognizes them and modifies the profile and triggers the warning in accordance. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 2 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 348 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - WARNING MODES T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 3 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 349 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES MODE 1 Mode 1 provides an alert warning for high descent rates into terrain and for rapidly increasing sink rates near the runway when landing. The SINK RATE voice message changes into PULL UP when the aircraft reaches the inner boundary. These alerts will continue until the boundary penetration is corrected. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 4 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 350 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EGPWS MODES - MODE 1 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 5 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 351 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES MODE 2 Mode 2 provides a warning based on the radio height and on how rapidly the radio height decreases. Mode 2A: Landing flaps not down and not in the glide slope beam (TERRAIN, TERRAIN). Mode 2B: Landing flaps down or in the glide slope beam within +/- 2 dots of deviation (ILS approach) (PULL UP). When in landing configuration the voice message will only be "TERRAIN" until the barometric altitude increases by 300 ft. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 6 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 352 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - MODE 2 T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 7 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 353 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES MODE 3 Mode 3 provides a warning for excessive altitude loss after take-off, climb or during a go-around (DONT SINK). This mode is based on radio height, altitude (inertial, barometric or computed altitude) and altitude rate (IVS computed altitude rate or barometric altitude rate). T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 8 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 354 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - MODE 3 T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 9 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 355 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES MODE 4 Mode 4 generates warnings based on the radio height, computed airspeed and aircraft configuration. TOO LOW TERRAIN is broadcast when the aircraft is below 1000 ft with landing gear retracted and/or flaps not in landing configuration. TOO LOW GEAR or TOO LOW FLAPS are broadcast depending on the aircraft configuration (gear up or down, flaps extended or retracted, aircraft speed in relation to the radio height). NOTE: The TOO LOW GEAR message has priority over the TOO LOW FLAPS message. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 10 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 356 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - MODE 4 T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 11 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 357 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES MODE 5 Mode 5 provides warnings when the aircraft flight path descends below the Glide/Slope beam during ILS approaches. The amplitude of the GLIDE SLOPE voice message and the repetition rate are increased when closing to the ground. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 12 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 358 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - MODE 5 T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 13 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 359 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES TERRAIN AWARENESS AND DISPLAY (TAD)(JAA & FAA) When a terrain threat forward of the aircraft path is detected, with respect to the aircraft position and the local terrain database, caution and warning alerts are triggered. When the envelope boundaries are met the following alerts are generated: - Terrain Caution Alert: "TERRAIN AHEAD" is broadcast (JAA). - Terrain Caution Alert: "CAUTION TERRAIN, CAUTION TERRAIN" is broadcast (FAA). - Terrain Warning Alert: "TERRAIN AHEAD, PULL UP" is broadcast (JAA). - Terrain Warning Alert: "TERRAIN, TERRAIN, PULL UP" is broadcast (FAA). These alerts are completed by a terrain image on the NDs: - Red area for warnings. - Yellow area for cautions. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 7
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 14 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 360 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - TAD T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 7
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 15 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 361 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES TERRAIN CLEARANCE FLOOR (TCF) The Terrain Clearance Floor is an increasing terrain clearance enveloppe around the airport runway to provide protection against Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT). The TCF alert function complements the existing Mode 4. When TCF alert envelope is penetrated "TOO LOW TERRAIN" is broadcast. It is based on current A/C position, nearest runway center point position and Radio Altitude. T M U E G P E 0 1 - T 0 8
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 16 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 362 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS MODES - TCF T M U E G P E 0 1 - P 0 8
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 17 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 363 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION If the voice message "TERRAIN, TERRAIN" is heard, in which mode and configuration are you? A - In mode 2A, with flaps down or in the glide slope beam. B - In mode 2B, with flaps down or in the glide slope beam. C - In mode 2A, with flaps not down and not in the glide slope beam. Which synthetic voice is broadcast in case of an excessive rate of descent? A - SINK RATE. B - TERRAIN TERRAIN. C - GLIDE SLOPE. T M U E G P E 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 18 Aug 31/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 364 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-48-00 EGPWS INDICATIONS ON ND CONTENTS: General Background Display Terrain Caution Alert Terrain Warning Alert Self Examination T M U E G P G 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 1 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 365 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS INDICATIONS ON ND GENERAL The Terrain Awareness alerting and Display (TAD) function displays the background terrain and terrain alerts, forward of the aircraft, in the ROSE and ARC mode navigation displays. BACKGROUND DISPLAY The background terrain display is depicted as variable density dot patterns in green, yellow or red depending on how close the terrain is relative to aircraft altitude. NOTE: Terrain is not shown if more than 2000 feet below the reference altitude and if the terrain elevation is within 400 ft of the runway elevation nearest the aircraft. T M U E G P G 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 2 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 366 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS INDICATIONS ON ND - BACKGROUND DISPLAY T M U E G P G 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 3 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 367 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS INDICATIONS ON ND TERRAIN CAUTION ALERT When the conditions of terrain caution alerts are met, the background image is enhanced to highlight the terrain caution threats by coloring them in solid yellow. TERRAIN WARNING ALERT When the conditions of terrain warning alerts are met, the background image is enhanced to highlight the terrain warning threats by coloring them in solid red (caution threats are also available). T M U E G P G 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 4 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 368 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS INDICATIONS ON ND - TERRAIN CAUTION AND WARNING ALERTS T M U E G P G 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 5 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 369 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION A yellow high density indication means that: A - An unknown terrain is being overflown. B - Terrain is between 1000 ft and 2000 ft above A/C altitude. C - There is no close terrain. When a Terrain Warning Alert is triggered: A - The red GPWS warning comes on with "TERRAIN ALERT" alert caution. B - "TERRAIN ALERT, PULL UP" alert warning is heard continuously associated with a red GPWS warning and the red "TERR AHEAD" message on ND. C - the amber G/S warning comes on with a cyan "TERR" message on ND. T M U E G P G 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 6 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 370 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-48-00 EGPWS COMPONENTS CONTENTS: EGPWC T M U E G P J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 1 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 371 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS COMPONENTS EGPWC IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1WZ LOCATION ZONE: 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Behind the latched door, the computer is fitted with: - a self test switch - a headphone jack - an RS232 test connector for a CRT or a PC - a PCMCIA interface for uploading or downloading internal EGPWC information. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U E G P J 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 2 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 372 EFFECTIVITY ALL EGPWS COMPONENTS - COMPUTER T M U E G P J 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 3 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 373 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. T M U E G P J 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-48-00 Page 4 Feb 28/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 374 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-51-00 DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Principle Components Indicating T M U D M E H 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 1 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 375 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION PRINCIPLE The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) provides digital readout of the aircraft slant range distance from a selected ground station. The system generates interrogation pulses from an onboard interrogator and sends them to a selected ground station. After a 50 micro seconds delay, the ground station replies. The interrogator determines the distance in Nautical Miles (NM) between the station and the aircraft. The interrogator detects the Morse audio signal which identifies the ground station. T M U D M E H 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 2 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 376 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE T M U D M E H 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 3 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 377 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The components are two antennae and two interrogators. The DME system is also connected to: - Primary Flight Displays (PFD), Navigation Displays (ND) and Digital Distance Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI) for display. - Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) control unit for display control. - Flight Management and Guidance Computers (FMGC) for tuning (manual and auto). - Captain and F/O Radio Management Panels (RMP) for back-up tuning. - Audio Control Panels (ACPs) for DME audio signal. T M U D M E H 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 4 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 378 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U D M E H 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 5 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 379 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION INDICATING The DME distance is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) (if ILS/DME) and on the Navigation Display (ND) (if VOR/DME). The DME distance is also shown on the two windows of the Digital Distance Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI). T M U D M E H 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 6 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 380 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME SYSTEM PRESENTATION - INDICATING T M U D M E H 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 7 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 381 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U D M E H 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 8 Nov 30/95 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 382 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-51-00 DME DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Back Up Tuning Antenna Users Suppressor AMU LGCIU Indicating CFDIU Self Examination T M U D M E A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 1 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 383 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) Sytem includes: - 2 DME Interrogators, - 2 DME Antennae. AUTO TUNING In normal operation each Flight Management Guidance Computer (FMGC) automatically tunes its ownside DME interrogator through its ownside Radio Management Panel (RMP) via port A. When the FMGC fails, the DME receives a discrete signal through the RMP to automatically select port B. With failure of one FMGC the other FMGC can control the DME interrogators, one directly, the other through its RMP. MANUAL TUNING From each Multipurpose Control and Display Unit (MCDU) both DMEs can be manually tuned through their ownside FMGC (via port A). BACK UP TUNING In case of dual FMGC failure the RMPs enable BACK-UP tuning. ANTENNA The DME antenna transmits the DME interrogation and receives the reply from the selected ground station. The DME antenna operates within the low band from 962 to 1213 Mhz (1025 to 1150 Mhz for interrogation and 962 to 1213 Mhz for reply). USERS The DME data is sent to the FMGCs for radio distance computation. SUPPRESSOR The DME and the Air Traffic Control (ATC) operate in the same frequency range. A suppressor coaxial between the ATC transponders and DME interrogators is necessary to prevent simultaneous transmission and to interrupt reception of the other systems. AMU The DME audio signals are transmitted to the Audio Management Unit (AMU) and then dispatched to the headsets and/or loudspeakers. The pilot can adjust the volume of the DME ground station by pressing the VOR pushbutton on the Audio Control Panel (ACP) or the ILS pushbutton in case of collocated ILS/DME (if ILS mode is selected on EFIS CTL Panel). T M U D M E A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 2 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 384 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME DESCRIPTION/OPERATION T M U D M E A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 3 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 385 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME DESCRIPTION/OPERATION LGCIU Each Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU) sends a discrete signal to the associated DME interrogator. This is a Ground/Flight information used by the receiver BITE module to count the flight legs. INDICATING DME data is sent to the Navigation Displays (NDs) and the Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) through the Display Management Computers (DMCs) and directly to the Digital Distance and Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI). CFDIU The MCDUs allow the systems to be tested and trouble shooting to be performed via the Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU). The tests are only available on ground. T M U D M E A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 4 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 386 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U D M E A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 5 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 387 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What is the suppressor coaxial between DME and ATC used for ? A - To inhibit DME operation. B - To prevent simultaneous transmission and to interrupt reception of the other systems. C - To prevent simultaneous transmission and to inhibit the transmission of the other systems. Where is the DME 1 information displayed ? A - On CAPT PFD and F/O PFD. B - On CAPT PFD, CAPT and F/O ND and DDRMI. C - On CAPT F/O PFD and ND. T M U D M E A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 6 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 388 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-51-00 DME INDICATIONS ON PFD AND ND CONTENTS: On PFD On ND VOR-D Pusbutton Failure Self Examination T M U D M E B 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 389 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME INDICATIONS ON PFD AND ND ON PFD When an Instrument Landing System (ILS) station is collocated with a Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) station, the ILS/DME distance is displayed in magenta in the left lower corner of the Primary Flight Display (PFD). This data comes into view when the ILS P/B on the EFIS control panel is pressed in. ON ND When the mode selector on the EFIS control panel, is set to ROSE or ARC mode and the ADF/VOR selector is set to VOR the DME distance is displayed in green in the left or right lower corner of the Navigation Display (ND). Nothing is displayed if non collocated VOR/DME ground station. T M U D M E B 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 390 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME INDICATIONS ON PFD AND ND (SHEET 1/2) T M U D M E B 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 391 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME INDICATIONS ON PFD AND ND VOR-D PUSHBUTTON In ROSE-NAV and ARC mode it is possible to show the DME and VOR/DME ground stations which are included in the navigation data base. If not tuned nor included in the flight plan the DME or VOR/DME ground stations are displayed in magenta when the VOR-D pushbutton is pressed in on the EFIS control panel. FAILURE When a failure occurs, the corresponding red DME flag is displayed in place of the distance, in the lower corner of the corresponding side for the ND and in the left lower corner for the PFD. T M U D M E B 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 392 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME INDICATIONS ON PFD AND ND (SHEET 2/2) T M U D M E B 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 393 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What does it mean when dashes are displayed instead of DME1 distance indication on the ND ? A - DME1 interrogator has failed. B - DME1 interrogator is not receiving the ground station signal. C - There is no DME station collocated to the VOR station selected. When the VOR-D pushbutton is pressed in, on the EFIS control panel,the ND shows: A - The DME and the VOR/DME ground stations included in the data base. B - Only the VOR/DME ground stations. C - The DME and the VOR/DME ground stations included in the flight plan. T M U D M E B 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 394 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-51-00 DME COMPONENTS CONTENTS: DME Interrogators (Collins) DME Interrogators (Allied) DME Interrogators (Thomson) DME Antennae T M U D M E F 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 395 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME COMPONENTS DME INTERROGATORS (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2SD1, 2SD2 LOCATION ZONE: 127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the interrogator is fitted with 2 LEDs and a TEST pushbutton. When the TEST pushbutton is pressed in, the functional test starts. At the end of the test, the color of the LEDs indicates the status of the LRU. - CONTROL FAIL LED red: test not completed. - LRU STATUS LED red: fault detected during test. - LRU STATUS LED green: no fault detected during test. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U D M E F 0 4 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 396 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME COMPONENTS - INTERROGATORS (COLLINS) T M U D M E F 0 4 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 397 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME INTERROGATORS (ALLIED) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2SD1, 2SD2 LOCATION ZONE: 127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the interrogator is fitted with two pushbutton switches and a Liquid Cristal Display (LCD). The LCD provides user interfaces for test, fault display and troubleshooting. The front face is also fitted with an RS-232 connector for interfacing with personal computers. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U D M E F 0 4 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 398 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME COMPONENTS - INTERROGATORS (ALLIED) T M U D M E F 0 4 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 399 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME INTERROGATORS (THOMSON) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2SD1, 2SD2 LOCATION ZONE: 127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the interrogator is fitted with a TEST pushbutton switch and six LEDs. - R/T OK (green): DME OK. - R/T FAIL (red): DME faulty. - BUS IN FAIL (amber): invalid input. - ANT FAIL (amber): antenna faulty. - IND N o 1 FAIL: indicator N o 1 faulty. - IND N o 2 FAIL: indicator N o 2 faulty. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U D M E F 0 4 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 400 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME COMPONENTS - INTERROGATORS (THOMSON) T M U D M E F 0 4 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 401 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME COMPONENTS DME ANTENNAE IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SD1, 3SD2 LOCATION ZONE: 121,127 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The DME antenna is of the blade type with a radiating cavity driven by capacitance coupling. It is vertically polarized and has an impedance of 50 ohms. DME and ATC antennae are interchangeable. T M U D M E F 0 4 - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 402 EFFECTIVITY ALL DME COMPONENTS - ANTENNAE T M U D M E F 0 4 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 403 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. T M U D M E F 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-51-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 404 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-52-00 ATC SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Principle Components T M U A T C F 0 8
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 405 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC SYSTEM PRESENTATION PRINCIPLE The Air Traffic Control (ATC) transponder is an integral part of the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS). The transponder is interrogated by radar pulses received from the ground station. It automatically replies by a series of pulses. These reply pulses are coded to supply identification (Mode A) and automatic altitude reporting (Mode C) of the aircraft on the ground controllers radar scope. These replies enable the controller to distinguish the aircraft and to maintain effective ground surveillance of the air traffic. The ATC transponder also responds to interrogations from aircraft equipped with a Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) (Mode S). T M U A T C F 0 8 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 406 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE T M U A T C F 0 8 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 407 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The components are two transponders, four antennae, and one ATC/TCAS control panel. Note: The TCAS/ATC control panels shown here after are given as examples. They may differ according to the aircraft configuration. T M U A T C F 0 8 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 408 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U A T C F 0 8 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 409 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A T C F 0 8
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 410 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-52-00 ATC DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General Control Panel Transponder Antennae Suppressor ADIRU FMGC CFDIU TCAS Self Examination T M U A T C A 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 1 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 411 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Air Traffic Control (ATC) system includes: - 1 control panel (common to both systems and TCAS), - 2 transponders, - 4 antennae. CONTROL UNIT A single ATC/TCAS control panel enables system selection. It provides the selected transponder with code and function data and,in return, receives status data. The ATC control panel converts selected mode and selected code data into digital data and transmits this data in ARINC 429 format to the selected transponder. The Landing Gear Control and Interface Units (LGCIUs) provide a ground/flight signal to the ATC transponder via the ATC control panel for BITE purposes. TRANSPONDER In normal operation, one ATC transponder operates and the other is in standby mode. The operating mode (A, C or S) of the transponder is determined by the decoding of the time between the interrogation pulses. The main function of the mode S transponder is surveillance. Each transponder has its own and unique address coded on 24 bits so that every interrogation can be directed to a specific aircraft preventing multiple replies. The mode S is also used in collision avoidance (TCAS). ANTENNAE The ATC antennae transmit replies to interrogations from the ATC ground station. Top and bottom antennae provide the antenna diversity features that allow a better radar coverage. The antenna operates in the 960 MHz to 1220 MHz frequency band with an interrogation frequency of 1030 MHz and a reply frequency of 1090 MHz. SUPPRESSOR The ATC, the DME and the TCAS operate in the same frequency range. A suppressor signal is transmitted, via a coaxial, by the operating system to inhibit the other systems and to prevent simultaneous transmission. ADIRU ADIRU 1 and ADIRU 2 provide barometric altitude to associated transponders for mode C. In case of failure of ADIRU 1 or 2, the pilot can switch to ADIRU 3 through the AIR DATA selector switch. FMGC The Flight Management and Guidance Computers (FMGCs) provide the flight number. This data will be transmitted to an ATC ground station after a mode S interrogation. T M U A T C A 0 4 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 2 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 412 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A T C A 0 4 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 ATC DESCRIPTION/OPERATION EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 3 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 413 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CFDIU The Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU) allows testing and trouble-shooting of the ATC system through the Multipurpose Control and Display Units (MCDUs). The tests are only available on ground. TCAS The Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) allows individual communications with each TCAS equipped aircraft through the Mode S transponder. This enables a coordination of avoidance manoeuvers by acquisation, at regular intervals, of the relative altitude and the separation range. T M U A T C A 0 4 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 4 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 414 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A T C A 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 5 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 415 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION The ATC transponders and DME transponders are: A - Connected by ARINC buses to exchange distance data. B - Connected by a suppressor coaxial which transmits an analog signal preventing simultaneous transmission. C - Not connected. If ADIRU 2 fails, is the ATC 2 transponder still able to operate in altitude reporting mode? A - Yes, because altitude data is automatically received from ADIRU 3. B - Yes, because altitude data will be recovered after manual switching of the AIR DATA selection to ADIRU 3. C - No, ATC 2 will be definitively lost. T M U A T C A 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 6 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 416 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-52-00 ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O CONTENTS: COLLINS Control Panel SEXTANT Control Panel GABLES Control Panel T M U N A V 3 0 8
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 417 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O COLLINS CONTROL PANEL GENERAL The purpose of this module is to understand the use of the various controls of the common ATC/TCAS control panel. MODE SELECTOR The mode selector enables the ATC transponder operation mode to be selected. - STBY position : No transmission and the answers of the two transponders are inhibited (electrically supplied but not operating). - XPDR position : The answers are transmitted on ground and in flight by the selected transponder. - TA-TA/RA-TFC positions : Enables the selection of the TCAS modes. NOTE: In STBY or XPDR position the TCAS advisory generation and surveillance functions are inhibited. SELECTOR KNOB The selector knob enables the selection of the ATC transmission code. The code range is 0000 to 7777. CODE DISPLAY WINDOW The liquid crystal display window shows the selected ATC identification code. There are specific ranges for emergency codes on Mode A, as for example : - 7700 to 7777 for emergency configuration, - 7600 for total failure of radio communication system. ATC FAIL LIGHT This FAULT light comes on in case of failure of the selected transponder. The ATC FAIL light also comes on during a functional or a lamp test. NOTE: In case of ATC control panel failure, the transponder continues to transmit the last displayed code. IDENT PUSHBUTTON When the IDENT pushbutton is pressed in, an additional identification pulse is generated in mode A and mode C replies. This is to obtain a more precise location of the aircraft. 1/2 SELECTOR This switch enables the selection of the desired active ATC system. When transponder 1 is active, transponder 2 is in standby. ABOVE/BELOW SWITCHES Used when TCAS system is installed. T M U N A V 3 0 8 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 418 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O - COLLINS T M U N A V 3 0 8 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 419 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O SEXTANT CONTROL PANEL GENERAL The purpose of this module is to understand the use of the various controls of the common ATC/TCAS control unit. STBY/AUTO/ON SELECTOR This selector enables the ATC transponder operation mode to be selected. - STBY position: Transmission and answers to ground station or other aircraft are inhibited (electrically supplied but not operating). - AUTO POSITION: In this mode, the transponder only operates in flight except for mode S which also operates on ground. - ON POSITION: In this position, the transponder operates in flight and on ground. 1/2 SELECTOR This selector enables the selection of the desired active ATC system. When transponder 1 is active, transponder 2 is in standby. ALT RPTG SELECTOR The ALT RPTG selector, when in ON position, enables the altitude transmission for the ATC mode C. Selection of the OFF position suppresses the altitude information transmission. The altitude is provided by ADIRU1 ( For ATC1) or 2 (For ATC2) or ADIRU3 in case of failure of ADIRU1 or 2. ATC FAIL LIGHT This FAULT light comes on in case of failure of the selected transponder. The ATC FAIL light also comes on during a functional or a lamp test. NOTE: In case of ATC control unit failure, the transponder continues to transmit the last displayed code. KEYBOARD The keyboard enables the selection of the ATC transmission code. When pressed in, the CLR key clears the code display and, when pressed twice, restores the previous code by the active code. The code range is from 0000 to 7777. T M U N A V 3 0 8 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 420 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O - SEXTANT T M U N A V 3 0 8 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 421 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O GABLES CONTROL PANEL GENERAL The purpose of this module is to understand the use of the various controls of the common ATC/TCAS control panel. 1/2 SELECTOR This switch enables the selection of the desired active ATC system. When transponder 1 is active, transponder 2 is in standby. XPNDR FAULT LIGHT This FAULT light comes on in case of failure of the selected transponder. The XPNDR FAULT light also comes on during a functional or a lamp test. NOTE: In case of ATC control panel failure, the transponder continues to transmit the last displayed code. KEYBOARD The keyboard enables the selection of the ATC transmission code. When pressed in, the CLR key clears the code display and, when pressed twice restores the previous code by the active code. The code range is 0000 to 7777. CODE DISPLAY WINDOW The liquid crystal display window shows the selected ATC identification code and the system in use. There are specific ranges for emergency codes on mode A, as for example : - 7700 to 7777 for emergency configuration. - 7600 for total failure of radio communication system. Fault indications can also be displayed. IDENT PUSHBUTTON When the IDENT pushbutton is pressed in, an additional identification pulse is generated in mode A and mode C replies. This is to obtain a more precise location of the aircraft. STBY/AUTO/ON MODE SELECTOR A mode selector switch enables the ATC transponder operation mode to be selected. - STBY position : No transmission and the answers of the two transponders are inhibited (electrically supplied but not operating). - AUTO position : The answers are transmitted only when the aircraft is in flight. - ON position : The answers are transmitted on ground and in flight. OFF-TA-TA/RA MODE SELECTOR Used when TCAS system is installed. T M U N A V 3 0 8 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 422 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC CONTROL PANEL D/O - GABLES T M U N A V 3 0 8 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 423 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U N A V 3 0 8
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 424 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-52-00 ATC COMPONENTS CONTENTS: ATC Transponders (Collins) ATC Transponders (Honeywell) ATC Antennae ATC Control Panel (Collins) ATC Control Panel (Sextant) ATC Control Panel (Gables) T M U A T C D 0 J
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 425 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS ATC TRANSPONDERS (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1SH1, 1SH2 LOCATION ZONE: 127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the transponder is fitted with 5 LEDs and a TEST pushbutton. When the TEST pushbutton is pressed in, the 5 LEDs come on. If the test is OK, the LEDs should go off when the TEST pushbutton is released out. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 electrical connector. T M U A T C D 0 J - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 426 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS - TRANSPONDERS (COLLINS) T M U A T C D 0 J - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 427 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS ATC TRANSPONDERS (HONEYWELL) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1SH1, 1SH2 LOCATION ZONE: 127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The front face of the transponder is fitted with 6 LEDs, a PUSH TO TEST pushbutton switch and a DATA LOADER plug. When the PUSH TO TEST pushbutton is pressed in, the 6 LEDs come on for approximately three seconds. After three others seconds, the XPDR PASS LED comes on green if the test is successfuly passed. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 electrical connector. T M U A T C D 0 J - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 428 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A T C D 0 J - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 ATC COMPONENTS - TRANSPONDERS (HONEYWELL) EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 429 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS ATC ANTENNAE IDENTIFICATION FIN: 7SH1, 7SH2, 7SH3, 7SH4 LOCATION ZONE: 127,128,223,224 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ATC antenna is of the blade type with a radiating cavity driven by capacitance coupling. It is vertically polarized and has an impedance of 50 ohms. ATC and DME antennae are interchangeable. T M U A T C D 0 J - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 430 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A T C D 0 J - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 ATC COMPONENTS - ANTENNAE EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 431 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS ATC CONTROL PANEL (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SH LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The control panel is composed of two independent modules, each dedicated to one transponder. A monitoring function checks that the transmitted data corresponds to the displayed data. T M U A T C D 0 J - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 432 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS - CONTROL PANEL (COLLINS) T M U A T C D 0 J - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 433 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS ATC CONTROL PANEL (SEXTANT) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SH LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The control panel is composed of two independent modules, each dedicated to one transponder. A monitoring function checks that the transmitted data corresponds to the displayed data. T M U A T C D 0 J - T 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 434 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS - CONTROL PANEL (SEXTANT) T M U A T C D 0 J - P 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 11 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 435 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS ATC CONTROL PANEL IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3SH LOCATION ZONE: 211 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The control panel is composed of two independent modules, each dedicated to one transponder. A monitoring function checks that the transmitted data corresponds to the displayed data. T M U A T C D 0 J - T 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 12 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 436 EFFECTIVITY ALL ATC COMPONENTS - CONTROL PANEL (GABLES) T M U A T C D 0 J - P 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 13 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 437 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK. T M U A T C D 0 J
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-52-00 Page 14 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 438 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-53-00 ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION CONTENTS: Principle Components Indicating T M U A D F F 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 439 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION PRINCIPLE The Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is a radio navigation aid. The ADF system provides: - An identification of the relative bearing to a selected ground station called Non Directional Beacon (NDB). - Aural identification of the ground station. The relative bearing is the angle between the aircraft heading and the aircraft/ground station axis. T M U A D F F 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 440 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE T M U A D F F 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 441 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION The combination of signals, received from two loop antennae and from one omni-directional sense antenna, provides bearing information. The ground stations operate in a frequency range of 190 to 1750 Khz. An additional Morse signal is provided to identify the selected ground station. T M U A D F F 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 442 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D F F 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION - PRINCIPLE EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 443 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The Automatic Direction Finder system is composed of two receivers and two antennae. The ADF system is also connected to: - Navigation Displays (ND) and Digital Distance Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI) for display. - Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) panels for control display. - Flight Management and Guidance Computer (FMGC) for auto-tuning. - Multipurpose Control Display Units (MCDU) for manual tuning. - Captain and First Officer Radio Management Panels (RMP) for back-up tuning. - Audio Control Panels (ACP) for ADF audio signal. Note: ADF 2 system is optional. T M U A D F F 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 444 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U A D F F 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 445 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION INDICATING The Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) system information can be displayed on the Navigation Displays (ND) system and on the Digital Distance Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI). On the NDs, depending on the position of the ADF selector switch on the EFIS control panel: - ADF 1 is represented by a single pointer - ADF 2 is represented by a double pointer. On the DDRMI, depending on the position of the ADF selector switch: - ADF 1 is represented by a single pointer - ADF 2 is represented by a double pointer. Note: Some DDRMIs are not equipped with the ADF capability. T M U A D F F 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 446 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF SYSTEM PRESENTATION - INDICATING T M U A D F F 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 9 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 447 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D F F 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 10 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 448 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-53-00 ADF DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS: General Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Back Up Tuning Antennae LGCIU Indicating CFDIU Self Examination T M U A D F A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 1 Jun 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 449 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) System includes: - 2 Identical ADF receivers, - 2 Identical ADF antennae. NOTE: ADF 2 system is optional. AUTO TUNING In NDB approach each Flight Management and Guidance Computer (FMGC) automatically tunes its ownside ADF receiver through its ownside Radio Management Panel(RMP). With failure of one FMGC, the other FMGC can control the two ADF receivers, one directly, the other through its Radio Management Panel (RMP). When the FMGC fails, the ADF receives a discrete through the RMP to automatically select port B. MANUAL TUNING From each Multipurpose Control and Display Unit (MCDU) both ADFs can be manually tuned through their ownside FMGC . BACK UP TUNING In case of dual FMGC failure, the RMPs enable BACK-UP tuning. ANTENNAE The ADF antenna provides three signals and consists of one sense antenna and two loop antennae called longitudinal antenna and lateral antenna. The ADF antenna comprises: - One pre-amplifier, for each antenna, supplied by the ADF receiver in + or - 12 VDC. - A test loop which enables a self test. The ADF ground stations operate in a frequency range of 190 to 1750 KHz divided into two parts: - Non Directional Beacons (NDB): 190 to 550 KHz, - Standard commercial broadcast AM stations: 550 to 1750 KHz. LGCIU Each Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU) sends discrete signals to the associated ADF receiver. This Ground/Flight information is used by the receiver BITE module to count the flight legs. T M U A D F A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 2 Jun 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 450 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF DESCRIPTION/OPERATION T M U A D F A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 3 Jun 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 451 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF DESCRIPTION/OPERATION INDICATING The ADF data is sent to the Navigation Displays (NDs) through the Display Management Computers (DMCs) and also to the DDRMI. The ADF audio signal is processed by the receiver and sent to the Audio Management Unit (AMU) and can be heard by the crew. NOTE: Some DDRMIs are not equipped with the ADF capability. CFDIU The MCDUs allow the systems to be tested and trouble shooting to be performed via the Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU). The tests are only available on ground. T M U A D F A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 4 Jun 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 452 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D F A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 5 Jun 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 453 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION How are the antenna amplifiers supplied ? A - By the 28 DC NORM BUS. B - By the 115 VAC NORM BUS. C - By + or - 12 VDC through the ADF Receiver. If FMGC 1 has failed, is the ADF 1 receiver tuned ? A - Yes, from the opposite FMGC. B - Yes, through RMP1. C - No, ADF 1 cannot be tuned. T M U A D F A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 6 Jun 30/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 454 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-53-00 ADF INDICATIONS ON ND CONTENTS: ADF Characteristics ADF Pointers NDB Pushbutton Failures Self Examination T M U A D F B 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 1 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 455 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF INDICATIONS ON ND ADF CHARACTERISTICS DISPLAY IN ROSE OR ARC MODE When the mode selector is set to ROSE or ARC mode, and the ADF/VOR selectors are set to ADF, the ADF station characteristics are displayed in green in the left lower corner (ADF1) or right lower corner (ADF2) of the ND. Note: ADF 2 system is optional POINTERS Two kinds of green pointer can show the ADF ground station bearings on the heading dial. - Single green pointer for ADF1 - Double green pointer for ADF2 T M U A D F B 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 2 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 456 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D F B 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 ADF INDICATIONS ON ND EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 3 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 457 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF INDICATIONS ON ND NDB PUSHBUTTON In ROSE-NAV and ARC modes, when the Non Directional Beacon (NDB) pushbutton is selected on the Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) control panel, magenta triangle symbols show the ADF ground stations. T M U A D F B 0 2 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 4 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 458 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF INDICATIONS ON ND T M U A D F B 0 2 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 5 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 459 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF INDICATIONS ON ND FAILURES When a failure occurs, a red flag is displayed in the left lower corner (ADF1) or right lower corner (ADF2) on the ND and the corresponding pointer disappear. T M U A D F B 0 2 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 6 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 460 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF INDICATIONS ON ND T M U A D F B 0 2 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 7 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 461 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION What is displayed in case of Non Computed Data? A - A RED flag. B - Dashes in place of identification. C - The ground station characteristics and pointer disappear. What is displayed in case of ADF failure? A - The pointer symbol and the ADF flag appear in RED. B - The ground station characteristics and pointer disappear and the RED ADF flag appears. C - No ADF indications on ND. T M U A D F B 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 8 May 31/00 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 462 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-53-00 ADF COMPONENTS CONTENTS: ADF Receiver (Collins) ADF Receiver (Allied) ADF Antennae T M U A D F D 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 1 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 463 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF COMPONENTS ADF RECEIVER (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2RP1, 2RP2 LOCATION ZONE: 127, 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the ADF Receiver is fitted with two LEDs and a TEST pushbutton switch. When it is pressed in, the functional test starts. If no fault is detected during the test the green LRU STATUS LED comes on. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. ADF RECEIVER (ALLIED) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 2RP1, 2RP2 LOCATION ZONE: 127, 128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the ADF Receiver is fitted with two momentary pushbutton switches and a Liquid Cristal Display (LCD). The LCD provides user intefaces for test, fault display and troubleshooting. The front face is also fitted with an RS-232 connector for interfacing with personnal computers. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U A D F D 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 2 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 464 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF COMPONENTS - ADF RECEIVERS T M U A D F D 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 3 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 465 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADF ANTENNAE IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3RP1, 3RP2 LOCATION ZONE: 244, 253 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION It is a combined loop and sense antenna enclosed in a fiberglass housing. The omnidirectional sense antenna is vertically polarized. The directional loop antennae are horizontally polarized. The output impedance of the antenna is 78 ohms. T M U A D F D 0 2 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 4 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 466 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D F D 0 2 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 ADF COMPONENTS - ADF ANTENNAE EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 5 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 467 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D F D 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-53-00 Page 6 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 468 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-55-00 VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION CONTENTS: VOR Principle MKR Principle Components VOR Indicating MKR Indicating T M U V O R G 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 1 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 469 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION VOR PRINCIPLE The Very high frequency Omni-directional Range(VOR) system is a medium-range radio navigation aid. The VOR system receives, decodes and processes bearing information from the omni-directional ground station (working frequency range: 108 to 117.95 Mhz) The ground VOR station generates a reference phase signal and a variable phase signal. The phase difference between these signals, called bearing, is function of the aircraft position with respect to the ground station. The bearing is the angle between the Magnetic North and the ground station/aircraft axis. Furthermore, the VOR station provides a Morse identification which identifies the station. T M U V O R G 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 2 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 470 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION - VOR PRINCIPLE T M U V O R G 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 3 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 471 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION MRK PRINCIPLE The MARKER (MKR) system is a radio navigation aid which indicates the distance between the aircraft and the runway threshold. The MARKER (MKR) system is normally used together with the ILS system during an ILS approach. T M U V O R G 0 2 - T 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 4 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 472 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION - MKR PRINCIPLE T M U V O R G 0 2 - P 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 5 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 473 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION COMPONENTS The VOR and MKR systems are composed of two receivers, one marker antenna and one dual VOR antenna. The VOR/MKR system is also connected to: - Navigation Displays (ND), Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and VOR/ADF/DME Radio Magnetic Indicator (VOR/ADF/DME RMI) for display. - Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) panels for control display. - Flight Management and Guidance Computers (FMGC) for auto-tuning. - Multipurpose Control Display Units (MCDU) for manual tuning. - Captain and First Officer Radio Management Panels (RMP) for back-up tuning. - Audio Control Panels (ACP) for VOR/MKR audio signal. T M U V O R G 0 2 - T 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 6 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 474 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION - COMPONENTS T M U V O R G 0 2 - P 0 3
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 7 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 475 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION VOR INDICATING The indicators show that the aircraft is flying from the ground station and is on the right,crossing and then on the left hand side of the course selected by the pilot. T M U V O R G 0 2 - T 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 8 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 476 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION - VOR INDICATING (EXAMPLE) T M U V O R G 0 2 - P 0 4
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 9 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 477 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION MKR INDICATING When the aircraft overflies the Marker, the type of Marker is display on the PFDs in different colors, and is indicated by an aural identification. T M U V O R G 0 2 - T 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 10 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 478 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MARKER SYSTEMS PRESENTATION - MKR INDICATING T M U V O R G 0 2 - P 0 5
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 11 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 479 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U V O R G 0 2
L E V E L
1 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 12 Jul 31/96 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 480 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-55-00 VOR/MKR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION CONTENTS General VOR Auto Tuning VOR Manual Tuning VOR Back Up Tuning VOR Antenna VOR Users MKR Control MKR Antenna AMU LGCIU Indicating CFDIU Self Examination T M U V O R A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 1 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 481 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MKR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION GENERAL The Very High Frequency Omni-Directional Range (VOR) and Marker (MKR) system includes: - 2 Identical VOR/MKR receivers (only MKR1 system is installed on aircraft), - 1 Dual VOR ANTENNA, - 1 MKR ANTENNA. VOR AUTO TUNING In normal operation each Flight Management and Guidance Computer (FMGC) automatically tunes its ownside VOR receiver through its ownside Radio Management Panel (RMP) via port A. With failure of one FMGC, the other FMGC can control the two VOR/MKR receivers, one directly, the other through its Radio Management Panel (RMP). When the FMGC fails, the VOR receives a discrete through the RMP to automatically select port B. VOR MANUAL TUNING From each Multipurpose Control and Display Unit (MCDU) both VORs can be manually tuned through their ownside FMGC . VOR BACK UP TUNING In case of dual FMGC failure, the RMPs enable BACK-UP tuning. VOR ANTENNA The dual VOR antenna receives the signals coming from the ground stations. The VOR Antenna operates in the 108 to 117.95 Mhz range. VOR USERS The VOR data is sent to the FMGCs for aircraft position computation. MKR CONTROL The system consists of two identical VOR/MKR receivers but only MKR one is operative as it is connected to the MKR antenna. The MKR system operates at a fixed frequency and does not need any control. MKR ANTENNA The MKR antenna receives MKR signals when the aircraft flies over the MKR beacons. The MKR Antenna operates at 75 Mhz. T M U V O R A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 2 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 482 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MKR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION T M U V O R A 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 3 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 483 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MKR DESCRIPTION/OPERATION AMU The pilot can adjust the volume of the VOR ground station and MKR beacon identification signals using the VOR and MKR pushbuttons on the AUDIO CONTROL PANEL (ACP). Selected VOR ground station and MKR beacon identification audio signals are transmitted to Audio Management Unit (AMU) and then dispatched to the headsets and/or loudspeakers LGCIU Each Landing Gear Control Interface Unit (LGCIU) sends discrete signals to the associated VOR receiver. This Ground/Flight information is used by the receiver BITE module to count the flight legs. INDICATING VOR data is sent to the Navigation Displays (ND) through the Display Management Computers (DMC) and to the Digital Distance and Radio Magnetic Indicator (DDRMI). The MKR data is sent to the Primary Flight Displays (PFD) through the Display Management Computers (DMC). CFDIU The MCDUs allow the systems to be tested and trouble shooted via the Centralized Fault Display Interface Unit (CFDIU). The tests are only available on ground. T M U V O R A 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 4 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 484 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U V O R A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 5 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 485 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION To which of the following is the MKR Antenna connected ? A - VOR/MKR receiver 2. B - VOR/MKR receiver 1. C - VOR/MKR receivers 1 and 2. If FMGC 2 has failed, is VOR 2 receiver tuned ? A - Yes, from the opposite FMGC. B - Yes, from the opposite FMGC but after switching. C - No, the VOR 2 cannot be tuned. T M U V O R A 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 6 Apr 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 486 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-55-00 VOR INDICATIONS ON ND CONTENTS: VOR Characteristics Pointers Course/Lateral Deviation VOR-D Pushbutton Failures Self Examination T M U V O R B 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 487 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND VOR CHARACTERISTICS DISPLAY IN ROSE OR ARC MODE When the mode selector is set to ROSE or ARC mode, and the ADF/VOR selector is switched to VOR, the VOR station characteristics are displayed in white in the left lower corner (VOR 1) or right lower corner (VOR 2) of the ND. POINTERS DISPLAY IN ROSE AND ARC MODES Two types of white pointer can show the VOR ground station bearings on the heading dial. - Single white bearing pointer for VOR 1 - Double white bearing pointer for VOR 2 T M U V O R B 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 488 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U V O R B 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
2 VOR INDICATIONS ON ND EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 489 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND COURSE/LATERAL DEVIATION CONDITIONS OF DISPLAY Additionally, in ROSE-VOR mode, other information is displayed on the ND. T M U V O R B 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 490 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND T M U V O R B 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 491 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND VOR-D PUSHBUTTON CONDITIONS OF DISPLAY In ROSE-NAV and ARC positions, it is possible to show in magenta the VOR ground stations which are not tuned nor already included in the flight plan. T M U V O R B 0 1 - T 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 492 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND T M U V O R B 0 1 - P 0 3
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 493 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND FAILURES CONDITIONS OF DISPLAY Depending on the mode selected on the EFIS control panel, red flags are displayed. T M U V O R B 0 1 - T 0 4
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 494 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR INDICATIONS ON ND T M U V O R B 0 1 - P 0 4
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 9 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 495 EFFECTIVITY ALL SELF EXAMINATION In which ND mode is the VOR course deviation information displayed ? A - In ROSE-VOR mode. B - In ROSE-NAV mode. C - In any mode. When is the "M" symbol displayed in the VOR characteristics ? A - When the VOR is tuned from the MCDU. B - When the VOR is tuned from the RMP. C - When a failure occurs. T M U V O R B 0 1
L E V E L
2 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 10 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 496 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-55-00 VOR/MKR COMPONENTS CONTENTS: VOR/MKR Receiver (Collins) VOR/MKR Receiver (Allied) VOR Antenna MKR Antenna T M U V O R E 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 1 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 497 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MKR COMPONENTS VOR/MKR RECEIVER (COLLINS) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3RS1,3RS2 LOCATION ZONE:127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the VOR/MKR Receiver is fitted with two LEDs and a TEST pushbutton switch. When it is pressed in, the functional test starts. If no fault is detected during the test the green LRU STATUS LED comes on. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. VOR/MKR RECEIVER (ALLIED) IDENTIFICATION FIN: 3RS1,3RS2 LOCATION ZONE:127,128 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The face of the VOR/MKR Receiver is fitted with two momentary pushbutton switches and a Liquid Cristal Display (LCD). The LCD provides user intefaces for test, fault display and troubleshooting. The front face is also fitted with an RS-232 connector for interfacing with personal computers. The back is fitted with an ARINC 600 connector. T M U V O R E 0 3 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 2 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 498 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MKR COMPONENTS - RECEIVERS T M U V O R E 0 3 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 3 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 499 EFFECTIVITY ALL VOR/MKR COMPONENTS VOR ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION FIN: 4RS LOCATION ZONE: 324 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The dual VOR antenna is located on the top of the tail. It is a small-sized half-wave folded dipole type. The antenna is horizontally polarized and has an impedance of 50 ohms. MKR ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION FIN: 1RS LOCATION ZONE: 133 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The dielectric, foam-filled, polyester fiberglass housing, fitted with a metal leading edge, protects against moisture and erosion. The antenna is horizontally polarized and has an impedance of 50 ohms. T M U V O R E 0 3 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 4 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 500 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U V O R E 0 3 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 VOR/MKR COMPONENTS - ANTENNAE EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 5 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 501 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U V O R E 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-55-00 Page 6 Nov 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 502 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-00-00 ECAM WARNINGS (EXCEPT ADIRS) CONTENTS: General ILS Fault PRED W/S Fault RA Fault TCAS Fault GPWS Fault GPWS TERR DET Fault GPS Fault FM/GPS POS DISAGREE T M U W A R N 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 1 Jun 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 503 EFFECTIVITY ALL ECAM WARNINGS GENERAL Note: There are no dedicated ECAM pages for the navigation system. In case of a NAV FAULT, there will be no system page called for the corresponding failure. ILS FAULT This warning is triggered in case of an ILS1 (or 2 or ILS1+2) receiver failure (LOC and G/S parts). In case of failure of one ILS receiver, the landing capability is limited to CAT1 (CAT1 inoperative when both receivers have failed). PRED W/S FAULT This warning is triggered in case of a detected windshear fault. RA FAULT This warning is triggered in case of an RA1 (or 2 or RA1+2) failure. In case of failure of both RAs, the landing capability is limited to CAT1. When only one RA has failed, no local warnings are shown but CAT3 is inoperative. TCAS FAULT This warning is triggered in case of a TCAS internal failure. T M U W A R N 0 1 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 2 Jun 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 504 EFFECTIVITY ALL ECAM WARNINGS T M U W A R N 0 1 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 3 Jun 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 505 EFFECTIVITY ALL ECAM WARNINGS GPWS FAULT This warning is triggered in case of a GPWS failure. Notice the amber FAULT light on the GPWS control panel. NOTE: In case of ILS1 failure, only mode 5 is inhibited, consequently the FAULT light does not come on and the GPWS FAULT message is not triggered. GPWS TERR DET FAULT This warning is triggered in case of terrain detection failure as well as the amber TERR FAULT light on the GPWS control panel. GPS FAULT This warning is triggered in case of a GPS1 (or 2 or 1+2) failure. FM/GPS POSITION DISAGREE When latitude or longitude from either GPSSU1 or 2 deviates more than 0.5 Nm the amber NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE is triggered. T M U W A R N 0 1 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 4 Jun 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 506 EFFECTIVITY ALL ECAM WARNINGS T M U W A R N 0 1 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 5 Jun 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 507 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U W A R N 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-00-00 Page 6 Jun 30/98 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 508 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-10-00 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General ADR SYSTEM TEST ADR OUTPUT TESTS ADR GROUND REPORT ADR INPUT STATUS IR SYSTEM TEST IR INTERFACE TEST IR GROUND REPORT IR INPUT STATUS ADR Self Test Values IR Self Test Values T M U A D I L 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 509 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION GENERAL The tests for ADR 1,2 and 3 are identical and the tests for IR 1,2 and 3 are also identical. Therefore, we will only see system 1 for each one. Remember that the ADR and IR are Type 1 systems. ADR SYSTEM TEST The activation of the SYSTEM TEST allows the power-up test and the continuous BITE test resident in the ADIRU to be repeated (check of the system integrity after an ADIRU replacement). When a fault is detected by the system, during the test, the failure data will be listed on the MCDU in the same way as trouble shooting data page (HEX coding). T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 510 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (ADR SYSTEM TEST) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 511 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION ADR OUTPUT TESTS 1.SLEW TESTS - ALT DYNAMIC SLEW test The activation of the ALT DYNAMIC SLEW test causes the ADR to output a simulated ramp of altitude (Label 203). The low and the high altitude limits, as well as the slew rate, are specified by the operator. The altitude increasing or decreasing is visualized on the PFD. The test is inhibited if TAS > 100 kts. - CAS DYNAMIC SLEW test The activation of the CAS DYNAMIC SLEW test causes the ADR to output a simulated ramp of Computed Air Speed (Label 206). The low and the high speed limits, as well as the slew rate, are specified by the operator. The speed increasing or decreasing is visualized by the operator on the PFD. The test is inhibited if TAS > 100 Kts. T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 512 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (SLEW TESTS) T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 5 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 513 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION ADR OUTPUT TESTS (CONT) 2.INTERFACE TESTS When the test input command to the ADIRU is activated, a sequence is initiated which simulates an actual flight state of the ADIRU. The ADR will provide calibrated test values to the instruments. This checks the computer, the transmission and the display of the air data parameters. Test sequence: -0 to 5 seconds: failure warning mode tested (see tables). -5 to 10 seconds: Altitude Ramp test (rate of 600 ft/mn). -10 seconds until test completion: fixed output test values. T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 6 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 514 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 3
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (ADR INTERFACE TEST) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 7 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 515 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION ADR OUTPUT TESTS (CONT) 3.AOA SENSOR TESTS The activation of the AOA SENSOR TEST causes the AOA sensor to be commanded to a fixed position (40 degrees) greater than the stall warning threshold thus, the Flight Warning Computer activates the aural STALL warning and the cricket sound. ADR GROUND REPORT When the GROUND REPORT line select key is pressed in, it reports all internal faults detected since the last landing. When a fault is detected by the system, during the test, the failure data will be listed on the MCDU in the same way as trouble shooting data page (HEX coding). T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 8 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 516 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 4
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (AOA SENSOR TEST AND GROUND REPORT) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 9 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 517 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION ADR INPUT STATUS When the INPUT STATUS line select key is pressed in, it describes the current state/value of the selected ADR inputs (discrete, analog and ARINC inputs). Example on the INPUT STATUS page 2/8: - WMO/MMO DISC 1 OPEN - WMO/MMO DISC 2 GND - WMO/MMO DISC 3 OPEN - WMO/MMO DISC 4 OPEN When no discrete is in the ground state (open), the ADR uses the BASIC LAW values for WMO/MMO (350 Kts, 0.82M). Only one of the four WMO/MMO program discretes can be in the ground state at any one time. Ex: The WMO/MMO DISC 2 is available and is provided by the L/G DOWN WMO/MMO SELECTION switch (22FP). The normal position of this switch is open and it is grounded after crew action for particular flights (ex: ferry flight). T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 5
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 10 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 518 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 5
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (ADR INPUT STATUS) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 11 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 519 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION IR SYSTEM TEST When the SYSTEM TEST line select key is pressed in, a complete test of the IR system is activated (power-up and continuous BITE tests). When a fault is detected by the system, during the test, the failure data will be listed on the MCDU in the same way as trouble shooting data page (HEX coding). NOTE: A lockout display is presented in case of a disagreement between ground information from CFDIU and ADIRU when the TEST mode is addressed (with TAS or Inertial GS > or = 100 Kts). T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 6
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 12 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 520 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 6
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (IR SYSTEM TEST) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 13 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 521 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION IR INTERFACE TEST When the test input command to the ADIRU is activated, a sequence is initiated which simulates an actual flight state of the ADIRU. The IR will provide calibrated test values to the instruments. This checks the computer, the transmission and the display of inertial reference parameters. The test mode is inhibited whenever any of the following conditions exist: - Ground speed > or = 20 Kts - IR in ATT mode. Test sequence: - 0 to 2 seconds: Output set to functional test, annunciator discretes energized (see table). - After 2 seconds: Output set to functional test, annunciator discretes released to normal status (see table). T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 7
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 14 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 522 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 7
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (IR INTERFACE TEST) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 15 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 523 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION IR GROUND REPORT When the GROUND REPORT line select key is pressed in, it reports all internal faults detected since the last landing. T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 8
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 16 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 524 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 8
L E V E L
3 ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION (IR GROUND REPORT) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 17 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 525 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADIRS/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGES PRESENTATION IR INPUTS STATUS When the INPUT STATUS line select key is pressed in, it describes the current state of the selected IR inputs (discrete, analog and ARINC inputs). Example on the INPUT STATUS page 4/6, ARINC input value from the Control Display Unit (CDU): - The SET LAT, SET LONG and SET HEADING displayed values are copies of data received from each of the listed signal sources (here the CDU). The latitude and the longitude inputs are processed during the ALIGN mode, the heading input is processed during the ATT mode. These displayed data are latched as display values until new valid source data is received from each signal source. In case of invalid inputs dashes (-----) are displayed. T M U A D I L 0 4 - T 0 9
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 18 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 526 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADR SELF TEST VALUES (IR INPUT STATUS) T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 0 9
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 19 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 527 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U A D I L 0 4
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 20 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 528 EFFECTIVITY ALL T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 1 0
L E V E L
3 ADR SELF TEST VALUES (OUTPUT BINARY WORD)(1/2) EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 21 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 529 EFFECTIVITY ALL ADR SELF TEST VALUES (2/2) T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 1 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 22 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 530 EFFECTIVITY ALL IR SELF TEST VALUES (1/2) T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 1 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 23 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 531 EFFECTIVITY ALL IR SELF TEST VALUES (2/2) T M U A D I L 0 4 - P 1 3
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-10-00 Page 24 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 532 EFFECTIVITY ALL 34 - NAVIGATION 34-42-00 RADIO ALTIMETER/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGE PRESENTATION CONTENTS: General LRRA ARINC Test LRRA RAMP Test T M U R A D E 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 1 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 533 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGE PRESENTATION GENERAL The RA is a type 1 system. The RA system is not available in CFDS back-up mode. LRRA ARINC TEST During the ARINC TEST, an integrity test is performed, the antena circuit and the CFDIU input data are tested. This test is performed after a Removal/Installation of a Radio Altimeter antenna or transceiver. During the test (0.8 second), observe the following indications on the CAPT PFD: - the bottom sector line moves down from the horizon line. - the radio altitude value indicates 40 ft. If no failure, at the end of the test, NO FAILURE DETECTED message appears on the MCDU. LRRA RAMP TEST The RAMP TEST tests the complete Radio Altimetric chain. A start altitude, a stop altitude and a slope must be entered prior to triggering the test. Then, the line key adjacent to TRIGGER has to be pressed. Observe on the CAPT PFD that: - Radio Altitude starts from the entered value, 0 ft in this example, then increases at a constant rate of 25 ft/s until reaching the Stop Altitude of 2500 ft. Also notice the movement of the red ribbon and the lower line of the attitude sphere on the PFD. NOTE: The REPLAY line key restarts the test. The CONTINUE line key continues the RAMP TEST if it was interrupted before the end. T M U R A D E 0 2 - T 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 2 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 534 EFFECTIVITY ALL RADIO ALTIMETER/CFDS SPECIFIC PAGE PRESENTATION T M U R A D E 0 2 - P 0 1
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 3 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0
Page 535 EFFECTIVITY ALL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK T M U R A D E 0 2
L E V E L
3 EFFECTIVITY 34-42-00 Page 4 Sep 30/99 _ A319/A320/A321 TECHNICAL TRAINING MANUAL 34 NAVIGATION MECHANICS / ELECTRICS & AVIONICS COURSE U F D 4 2 0 0